Parker SSD Drives 690PB to PF Installation Manual

Parker SSD Drives 690PB to PF Installation Manual
690+ Series
AC Drive
Frame B, C, D, E & F
Product Manual
HA465492U005 Issue 5
Compatible with Version 5.x Software
© Copyright 2007 Parker SSD Drives, a division of Parker Hannifin Ltd.
All rights strictly reserved. No part of this document may be stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any
form or by any means to persons not employed by a Parker SSD Drives company without written permission
from Parker SSD Drives, a division of Parker Hannifin Ltd . Although every effort has been taken to ensure the
accuracy of this document it may be necessary, without notice, to make amendments or correct omissions.
Parker SSD Drives cannot accept responsibility for damage, injury, or expenses resulting therefrom.
WARRANTY
Parker SSD Drives warrants the goods against defects in design, materials and workmanship for the period of 12 months from the date of delivery on the
terms detailed in Parker SSD Drives Standard Conditions of Sale IA058393C.
Parker SSD Drives reserves the right to change the content and product specification without notice.
Cont.2
Requirements
IMPORTANT: Please read this information BEFORE installing the equipment.
Intended Users
This manual is to be made available to all persons who are required to install, configure or
service equipment described herein, or any other associated operation.
The information given is intended to highlight safety issues, EMC considerations, and to enable
the user to obtain maximum benefit from the equipment.
Complete the following table for future reference detailing how the unit is to be installed and
used.
INSTALLATION DETAILS
Serial Number
(see product label)
Where installed
(for your own
information)
Unit used as a:
(refer to Certification
for the Inverter)
R Component
R Relevant Apparatus
Unit fitted:
R Wall-mounted
R Enclosure
Application Area
The equipment described is intended for industrial motor speed control utilising AC induction or
AC synchronous machines.
Personnel
Installation, operation and maintenance of the equipment should be carried out by qualified
personnel. A qualified person is someone who is technically competent and familiar with all
safety information and established safety practices; with the installation process, operation and
maintenance of this equipment; and with all the hazards involved.
Product Warnings
Caution
Risk of electric
shock
Caution
Refer to
documentation
Earth/Ground
Protective
Conductor
Terminal
Cont.3
Hazards
DANGER! - Ignoring the following may result in injury
1.
This equipment can endanger life by exposure to
rotating machinery and high voltages.
2.
The equipment must be permanently earthed due to
the high earth leakage current, and the drive motor
must be connected to an appropriate safety earth.
3.
Ensure all incoming supplies are isolated before
working on the equipment. Be aware that there may
be more than one supply connection to the drive.
4.
There may still be dangerous voltages present at
power terminals (motor output, supply input phases,
DC bus and the brake, where fitted) when the motor
is at standstill or is stopped.
5.
For measurements use only a meter to IEC 61010 (CAT
III or higher). Always begin using the highest range.
CAT I and CAT II meters must not be used on this
product.
6.
Allow at least 5 minutes for the drive's capacitors to
discharge to safe voltage levels (<50V). Use the
specified meter capable of measuring up to 1000V dc &
ac rms to confirm that less than 50V is present between
all power terminals and earth.
7.
Unless otherwise stated, this product must NOT be
dismantled. In the event of a fault the drive must be
returned. Refer to "Routine Maintenance and Repair".
WARNING! - Ignoring the following may result in injury or damage to equipment
SAFETY
Where there is conflict between EMC and Safety requirements, personnel safety shall always take precedence.
• Never perform high voltage resistance checks on the
wiring without first disconnecting the drive from the
circuit being tested.
• Whilst ensuring ventilation is sufficient, provide
guarding and /or additional safety systems to
prevent injury or damage to equipment.
• When replacing a drive in an application and before
returning to use, it is essential that all user defined
parameters for the product’s operation are correctly
installed.
• All control and signal terminals are SELV, i.e. protected
by double insulation. Ensure all external wiring is rated
for the highest system voltage.
• Thermal sensors contained within the motor must have
at least basic insulation.
• All exposed metalwork in the Inverter is protected by
basic insulation and bonded to a safety earth.
• RCDs are not recommended for use with this product
but, where their use is mandatory, only Type B RCDs
should be used.
EMC
• In a domestic environment this product may cause
• This is a product of the restricted sales distribution class
radio interference in which case supplementary
mitigation measures may be required.
• This equipment contains electrostatic discharge
(ESD) sensitive parts. Observe static control
precautions when handling, installing and servicing
this product.
according to IEC 61800-3. It is designated as
“professional equipment” as defined in EN61000-3-2.
Permission of the supply authority shall be obtained
before connection to the low voltage supply.
CAUTION!
APPLICATION RISK
• The specifications, processes and circuitry described herein are for guidance only and may need to be adapted to the
user’s specific application. We can not guarantee the suitability of the equipment described in this Manual for
individual applications.
RISK ASSESSMENT
Under fault conditions, power loss or unintended operating conditions, the drive may not operate as intended.
In particular:
• Stored energy might not discharge to safe levels
• The motor's direction of rotation might not be controlled
as quickly as suggested, and can still be present
• The motor speed might not be controlled
even though the drive appears to be switched off
• The motor might be energised
A drive is a component within a drive system that may influence its operation or effects under a fault condition.
Consideration must be given to:
• Stored energy
• Supply disconnects
• Sequencing logic
• Unintended operation
Cont.4
Contents
Contents
Chapter 1
Page
GETTING STARTED
Introduction .................................................................................................. 1-1
Equipment Inspection ................................................................................... 1-1
Packaging and Lifting Details ...................................................................... 1-1
About this Manual ........................................................................................ 1-2
Initial Steps .............................................................................................................1-2
How the Manual is Organised .................................................................................1-2
Information for Users without a Keypad .......................................................1-3
Chapter 2
AN OVERVIEW
OF THE
D R I VE
Component Identification ............................................................................. 2-1
Control Features ........................................................................................... 2-6
Functional Overview ..................................................................................... 2-7
Filter Board (Frame B only) ......................................................................................2-8
Power Board/Stack..................................................................................................2-8
Control Board.........................................................................................................2-8
Processor....................................................................................................2-8
Technology Options ....................................................................................2-8
Keypad Interface.........................................................................................2-8
System Board Interface................................................................................2-8
Chapter 3
INSTALLING
THE
DRIVE
Mechanical Installation ................................................................................ 3-1
Mounting the Drive..................................................................................................3-1
Ventilation ..............................................................................................................3-1
• Minimum Air Clearance (Frame B).........................................................3-2
• Minimum Air Clearance (Frame C) ........................................................3-3
• Minimum Air Clearance (Frame D) ........................................................3-5
• Minimum Air Clearance (Frame E).........................................................3-7
• Minimum Air Clearance (Frame F) .......................................................3-10
Electrical Installation .................................................................................. 3-12
Gland Plate Details ...............................................................................................3-12
Cable Gland Requirements....................................................................................3-13
Protective Earth (PE) Connections ...........................................................................3-13
Power Wiring Connections (Frame B) .....................................................................3-14
Power Wiring Connections (Frame C).....................................................................3-14
Power Wiring Connections (Frame D).....................................................................3-15
Power Wiring Connections (Frame E)......................................................................3-15
Power Wiring Connections (Frame F)......................................................................3-16
Motor Thermistor Connections ...............................................................................3-16
Control Wiring Connections...................................................................................3-17
Terminal Block Acceptance Sizes ............................................................................3-18
Terminal Tightening Torques..................................................................................3-18
Cont.5
Contents
Contents
Page
Optional Equipment ................................................................................... 3-19
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Chapter 4
OPERATING
System Board .....................................................................................3-19
Encoder Connections ..........................................................................3-20
Parker SSD Drives Approved Encoders .................................................3-20
Technology Options............................................................................3-21
Fitting the Remote 6901 Keypad ..........................................................3-23
Top Cover ..........................................................................................3-24
External Brake Resistor ........................................................................3-24
External AC Supply EMC Filter .............................................................3-26
EMC Motor Output Filter .....................................................................3-30
Output Contactors ..............................................................................3-30
Earth Fault Monitoring Systems ............................................................3-30
Line Chokes (input) .............................................................................3-30
AC Motor Choke (output) ....................................................................3-30
5703/1 Speed Repeater Support .........................................................3-30
THE
DRIVE
Pre-Operation Checks .................................................................................. 4-1
Control Philosophy........................................................................................ 4-2
Start/Stop and Speed Control....................................................................... 4-2
• Selecting Local or Remote Control .........................................................4-3
Initial Start-up Routines ............................................................................... 4-4
Routine 1: Remote Control using Control Terminals ..................................................4-4
• Reading the Status LEDs ........................................................................4-4
Routine 2: Local Control using the Keypad ...............................................................4-5
• Set-up as an Open-loop Drive (V/F Fluxing) ...........................................4-6
• Set-up using the Sensorless Vector Fluxing Mode ....................................4-6
• Set-up using the Closed-loop Vector Mode.............................................4-7
The Autotune Feature ..............................................................................................4-7
• Stationary or Rotating Autotune?............................................................4-8
• Necessary Data ....................................................................................4-8
• Performing a Rotating Autotune .............................................................4-8
• Performing a Stationary Autotune ..........................................................4-9
• Setting the Encoder Sign........................................................................4-9
The Start/Stop Mode Explained .................................................................. 4-10
Starting and Stopping Methods.................................................................. 4-11
Normal Stopping Methods.....................................................................................4-11
• Ramp to Stop......................................................................................4-12
• Coast to Stop......................................................................................4-12
Advanced Stopping Methods .................................................................................4-13
• Forced Fast Stop .................................................................................4-13
• Forced Coast Stop ..............................................................................4-13
• The Trip Condition ..............................................................................4-13
• Logic Stopping....................................................................................4-14
Cont.6
Contents
Contents
Page
Starting Methods ...................................................................................................4-14
• Starting Several Drives Simultaneously .................................................4-15
• Single Wire Logic Starting....................................................................4-15
• Two Wire Logic Starting.......................................................................4-15
• Three Wire Logic Starting ....................................................................4-15
Chapter 5
T H E K E Y PA D
Connecting the Keypad ................................................................................ 5-1
• The Power-Up Condition .......................................................................5-1
Controlling the Drive using the Keypad ....................................................... 5-2
Control Key Definitions ............................................................................................5-2
• Keys for Programming the Drive ............................................................5-2
• Keys for Operating the Drive Locally ......................................................5-2
LED Indications .......................................................................................................5-3
The Menu System .......................................................................................... 5-4
Navigating the Menu System....................................................................................5-4
Menu Viewing Levels ...............................................................................................5-4
Changing a Parameter Value...................................................................................5-5
What do the Symbols mean next to some Parameters?..............................................5-5
• Parameter Status Information
 =.................................................5-5
• Expanded Menu Information >>..........................................................5-5
Alert Message Displays ............................................................................................5-5
The Menu System Map ............................................................................................5-6
The PROG Key ........................................................................................................5-8
The L/R Key ............................................................................................................5-8
The OPERATOR Menu.................................................................................... 5-9
Parameter Selection.................................................................................................5-9
String Entry ...........................................................................................................5-10
• Customising the Parameter Name .......................................................5-10
The DIAGNOSTICS Menu ............................................................................ 5-11
The QUICK SETUP Menu ............................................................................. 5-15
The SYSTEM Menu ....................................................................................... 5-16
Saving/Restoring/Deleting Your Application............................................................5-16
Selecting the Language .........................................................................................5-18
Special Menu Features................................................................................ 5-18
Quick Save Feature ...............................................................................................5-18
Quick Tag Information ..........................................................................................5-19
Quick Link Information ..........................................................................................5-19
Password Protection ..............................................................................................5-20
• To Activate Password Protection ...........................................................5-20
• To De-activate Password Protection......................................................5-20
• To Re-activate Password Protection ......................................................5-20
• To Remove Password Protection (default status) ....................................5-20
Cont.7
Contents
Contents
Page
Power-up Key Combinations ...................................................................... 5-21
Resetting to Factory Defaults (2-button reset)...........................................................5-21
Changing the Product Code (3-button reset)...........................................................5-21
Quick Enter Configuration Mode............................................................................5-22
Chapter 6
TRIPS
AND
FAULT FINDING
Trips .............................................................................................................. 6-1
What Happens when a Trip Occurs..........................................................................6-1
Drive Indications .........................................................................................6-1
Keypad Indications (when connected)...........................................................6-1
Resetting a Trip Condition........................................................................................6-1
Using the Keypad to Manage Trips...........................................................................6-2
Trip Messages.............................................................................................6-2
Automatic Trip Reset....................................................................................6-5
Setting Trip Conditions ................................................................................6-5
Viewing Trip Conditions ..............................................................................6-5
Checksum Fail ........................................................................................................6-5
Drive Indications .........................................................................................6-5
Keypad Indications (when connected)...........................................................6-5
Fault Finding................................................................................................. 6-6
Chapter 7
R O U T I N E M A I N TE N A N C E
AND
REPAIR
Routine Maintenance.................................................................................... 7-1
Repair ........................................................................................................... 7-1
Saving Your Application Data ..................................................................................7-1
Returning the Unit to Parker SSD Drives....................................................................7-1
Disposal .................................................................................................................7-1
Chapter 8
T E CH N I C A L S P E C I F I CA T I O N S
Understanding the Product Code .............................................................................8-1
• Model Number (Europe)........................................................................8-1
• Catalog Number (North America)..........................................................8-4
Environmental Details..............................................................................................8-5
Earthing/Safety Details ............................................................................................8-5
Cabling Requirements for EMC Compliance .............................................................8-6
Cooling Fans ..........................................................................................................8-6
Electrical Ratings (230V Build Variant) ......................................................................8-7
Electrical Ratings (400V Build Variant) ......................................................................8-9
Electrical Ratings (500V Build Variant) ....................................................................8-12
Input Fuse Ratings (Europe)....................................................................................8-14
External AC Supply (RFI) Filters...............................................................................8-16
EMC Compliance..................................................................................................8-16
Internal Dynamic Brake Switch (Frame B)................................................................8-18
Internal Dynamic Brake Switch (Frame C) ...............................................................8-18
Internal Dynamic Brake Switch (Frame D) ...............................................................8-19
Cont.8
Contents
Contents
Page
Internal Dynamic Brake Switch (Frame E)................................................................8-19
Internal Dynamic Brake Switch (Frame F)................................................................8-20
Control Terminals .................................................................................................8-21
System Board Terminals (option) ............................................................................8-22
Analog Inputs/Outputs ..........................................................................................8-23
Digital Inputs ........................................................................................................8-23
Digital Outputs .....................................................................................................8-23
System Board Digital Inputs/Outputs (DIGIO11-15) ................................................8-23
Supply Harmonic Analysis (Frame B Constant) ........................................................8-24
Supply Harmonic Analysis (Frame C Constant) .......................................................8-25
Supply Harmonic Analysis (Frame C Quadratic)......................................................8-26
Supply Harmonic Analysis (Frame D Constant) .......................................................8-28
Supply Harmonic Analysis (Frame D Quadratic)......................................................8-29
Supply Harmonic Analysis (Frame E Constant) ........................................................8-31
Supply Harmonic Analysis (Frame E Quadratic) ......................................................8-32
Supply Harmonic Analysis (Frame F Constant) ........................................................8-34
Supply Harmonic Analysis (Frame F Quadratic) ......................................................8-35
Chapter 9
CERTIFICATION
FOR THE
DRIVE
Requirements for EMC Compliance............................................................... 9-1
Minimising Radiated Emissions ................................................................................9-1
Earthing Requirements.............................................................................................9-1
• Protective Earth (PE) Connections ...........................................................9-1
• EMC Earth Connections ........................................................................9-1
Cabling Requirements .............................................................................................9-2
• Planning Cable Runs.............................................................................9-2
• Increasing Motor Cable Length..............................................................9-2
EMC Installation Options .........................................................................................9-3
• Screening & Earthing (wall mounted, Class A) ........................................9-3
• Screening & Earthing (cubicle mounted, Class B) ....................................9-3
• Star Point Earthing ................................................................................9-4
• Sensitive Equipment ..............................................................................9-5
Requirements for UL Compliance ................................................................. 9-6
• Solid-State Motor Overload Protection ...................................................9-6
• Short Circuit Rating ...............................................................................9-6
• Solid-State Short-Circuit Protection.........................................................9-6
• Recommended Branch Circuit Protection ................................................9-6
• Motor Base Frequency...........................................................................9-6
• Field Wiring Temperature Rating............................................................9-6
• Field Wiring Terminal Markings .............................................................9-6
• Terminal Tightening Torques .................................................................9-6
• Recommended Wire Sizes .....................................................................9-7
• Field Grounding Terminals....................................................................9-9
• Operating Ambient Temperature ...........................................................9-9
• Direct Wall-Mountable Models ..............................................................9-9
Cont.9
Contents
Contents
Page
• Input Fuse Ratings (North America) ......................................................9-10
European Directives and the CE Mark........................................................ 9-11
CE Marking for Low Voltage Directive ....................................................................9-11
CE Marking for EMC - Who is Responsible?............................................................9-11
• Legal Requirements for CE Marking .....................................................9-12
• Applying for CE Marking for EMC........................................................9-12
Which Standards Apply?........................................................................................9-12
• Power Drive Product Specific................................................................9-12
Certificates............................................................................................................9-14
Chapter 10 A P P L I C A T I O N N O T E S
Synchronous Motor Control ........................................................................ 10-1
Brake Motors .............................................................................................. 10-1
Using Line Chokes ...................................................................................... 10-1
Using Output Contactors............................................................................. 10-2
Using Motor Chokes.................................................................................... 10-2
Using Multiple Motors on a Single Drive.................................................... 10-3
Dynamic Braking ........................................................................................ 10-3
High Starting Torque .................................................................................. 10-4
Winder Applications ................................................................................... 10-4
Roll Diameter Calculation Accuracy........................................................................10-4
Basic Set-up Instruction..........................................................................................10-6
• Information Required ..........................................................................10-6
• Set-up with no Web connected to the Winder .......................................10-7
Equations .............................................................................................................10-7
• Simple Centre Winder Equations .........................................................10-7
2-Q Common DC Bus Applications ........................................................... 10-10
4-Q Regen Control/Common DC Bus Applications ................................... 10-12
Introduction ........................................................................................................10-12
4-Q Active Front End...........................................................................................10-13
• EMC Filtering....................................................................................10-14
• Contactor and Fusing .......................................................................10-14
Drive Set-up........................................................................................................10-15
Macro 8 : 4Q Regen ...........................................................................................10-16
Connection Diagram for Macro 8A Single Motor System .......................................10-16
A Single Motor System.........................................................................................10-17
A Multi-Motor System ..........................................................................................10-18
A Smart Brake System..........................................................................................10-19
DC Link Fuses .....................................................................................................10-20
Pre-Charge Sizing ...............................................................................................10-21
3-Phase Choke Sizing..........................................................................................10-22
Chapter 11 T H E D E F A U L T A P P L I C A T I O N
The Default Application .............................................................................. 11-1
Macro Descriptions ..................................................................................... 11-1
Macro 0 ...................................................................................................11-1
Macro 1: Basic Speed Control (default) ......................................................11-3
Cont.10
Getting Started
1-1
GETTING STARTED
1
Introduction
The 690+ Series AC Drive is designed for speed control of standard 3-phase induction motors.
Larger models are available in a range of ratings for constant torque and quadratic torque
applications. This dual mode feature provides a cost effective solution to general industrial
applications, as well as the control of pumps and fans.
•
The unit can be controlled remotely using configurable analogue and digital inputs and
outputs, requiring no optional equipment.
• Controlling the unit locally using the 6901 Keypad, or remotely using ConfigEd Lite (or
other suitable PC programming tool) gives access to parameters, diagnostic messages, trip
settings and full application programming. Other features also become available, such as the
advanced sensorless vector control scheme which gives high torque, low speed operation;
selectable switching frequencies; and a unique Quiet Pattern control system that minimises
audible noise from the motor.
• Technology Options can be fitted to the drive to give serial communications, closed loop
speed control, and the factory-fitted dynamic braking functions.
• A factory-fitted System Board enables the drive for high end web processing or mini PLC
replacement applications.
The optional internal RFI filters offer enhanced EMC compliance without the need for
additional external components (where fitted).
IMPORTANT: Motors used must be suitable for drive duty.
Note:
Do not attempt to control motors whose rated current is less than 25% of the drive rated
current. Poor motor control or Autotune problems may occur if you do.
Equipment Inspection
•
•
Check for signs of transit damage
Check the product code on the rating label conforms to your requirement.
If the unit is not being installed immediately, store the unit in a well-ventilated place away from
high temperatures, humidity, dust, or metal particles.
Refer to Chapter 2: “An Overview of the Drive” to check the rating label/product code.
Refer to Chapter 7: “Routine Maintenance and Repair” for information on returning damaged
goods.
Packaging and Lifting Details
Caution
The packaging is combustible and, if disposed of in this manner incorrectly, may lead to
the generation of lethal toxic fumes.
Save the packaging in case of return. Improper packaging can result in transit damage.
Use a safe and suitable lifting procedure when moving the drive. Never lift the drive by its
terminal connections.
Prepare a clear, flat surface to receive the drive before attempting to move it. Do not damage
any terminal connections when putting the drive down.
Refer to Chapter 3: “Installing the Drive” - Mechanical Installation for unit weights.
690+ Series AC Drive
1-2
Getting Started
About this Manual
This manual is intended for use by the installer, user and programmer of the 690+ drive. It
assumes a reasonable level of understanding in these three disciplines.
Note: Read Safety Information before proceeding with the installation and operation of this
unit.
Enter the “Model Number” from the rating label into the table at the front of this manual. It is
important that you pass these manuals on to any new user of this unit.
Initial Steps
Use the manuals to help you plan the following:
Installation
Know your requirements:
z certification requirements, CE/UL/CUL conformance z wall-mount or enclosure?
z conformance with local installation requirements z supply and cabling requirements
Operation
Know your operator:
z how is it to be operated, local and/or remote? z what level of user is going to operate the
unit? z decide on the best menu level for the Keypad (where supplied)
Programming (Keypad or suitable PC programming tool only)
Know your application:
z install the most appropriate macro z plan your “block diagram programming” z enter a
password to guard against illicit or accidental changes z customise the keypad to the
application
How the Manual is Organised
The information is arranged in to separate “Installation” and “Software” Product Manuals.
The Installation Product Manual is considered to be Volume 1, the Software Product Manual is
Volume 2. Each manual is divided into chapters and paragraphs. Page numbering restarts with
every chapter, i.e. 5-3 is Chapter 5, page 3.
Application Block Diagrams
You will find the appropriate diagrams at the rear of each manual. The pages unfold to show a
complete block diagram, these will become your programming tool as you become more
familiar with the 690+ unit’s software.
Quick-Start Guide
Chapters 3 and 4
install and run
the product
Chapter 1
explains all the
function blocks
Chapter 5
details the
Operator Station
and menu system
Chapter 2
lists all the
parameters
Chapter 8
holds many of the
technical details
Installation Product Manual
Chapter 5
has all the
macro details
Software Product Manual
Information for Users without a Keypad
DEFAULT
This symbol identifies important text for users operating the drive using the default (factory) setup. If the text is italic, such as this, then the information is especially for users without the
keypad or suitable PC programming tool.
690+ Series AC Drive
An Overview of the Drive
2-1
AN OVERVIEW OF THE DRIVE
2
Component Identification
Front View (with items removed)
13
2
10
17
14
1
15
11
12
16
8
3
9
7
6
5
4
Figure 2-1 690+ AC Drive, Frame B 0.75 - 4.0kW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Main drive assembly
Top cover (optional)
6053 technology box (optional)
Terminal cover retaining screw
Terminal cover
Gland plate
Cooling fan
6901 Keypad
Blank cover (Part Number: LA389836U001)
690+ Series AC Drive
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Control terminals
Power terminals
Earth terminals
Keypad port (P3)
Future communications option (P8)
Thermistor connection
Speed feedback board (optional)
System Board (optional)
2-2
An Overview of the Drive
Front View (with items removed)
12
2
16
9
5
16
17
10
1
11
8
7
4
13
6
15
14
3
Figure 2-2 690+ AC Drive, Frame C 5.5 - 11.0kW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Main drive assembly
Top cover (optional)
Terminal cover retaining screw
Terminal cover
RS232 programming port (P3)
Power terminal shield
6901 Keypad
Blank cover (Part Number: LA389836U001)
Control terminals
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Power terminals
Earthing points
Keypad port (P3)
Gland plate
Comms technology box (optional)
Speed feedback technology box (optional)
Future communications option (P8)
System Board (optional)
Through-panel fixing plate and screws not illustrated
690+ Series AC Drive
An Overview of the Drive
2-3
Front View (with items removed)
20
14
1
5
10
6
21
9
22
11
7
13
12
13
8
4
17
18
15
16
19
3
2
Figure 2-3 690+ AC Drive, Frame D 15 - 22kW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Main drive assembly
Lower front cover retaining screw
Lower front cover
Upper front cover retaining screw
Upper front cover
RS232 programming port (P3)
6901 Keypad
Blank cover (Part Number: LA389836U001)
Keypad port (P3)
Control terminals
Power terminals
690+ Series AC Drive
12
Earthing points
13
Chassis fan
14
Power board fan
15
Comms technology box (optional)
16
Speed feedback technology box (optional)
17
Power terminal shield
18
Gland plate
19
Gland plate retaining screw
20
Top cover (optional)
21
Future communications option (P8)
22
System Board (optional)
Through-panel fixing plate and screws not illustrated
2-4
An Overview of the Drive
20
Front View (with items
removed)
1
13
13
4
5
14
14
9
21
10
6
17
7
11
22
8
12
4
15
16
18
19
3
2
Figure 2-4 690+ AC Drive, Frame E 30 - 45kW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Main drive assembly
Lower front cover retaining screw
Lower front cover
Upper front cover retaining screw
Upper front cover
RS232 programming port (P3)
6901 Keypad
Blank cover (Part Number: LA389836U001)
Keypad port (P3)
Control terminals
Power terminals
Earthing points
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Chassis fan
Power board fan
Comms technology box (optional)
Speed feedback technology box (optional)
Future communications option (P8)
Gland plate
Gland plate retaining screw
Top cover (optional)
Motor thermistor terminals
System Board (optional)
Through-panel fixing plate and screws not illustrated
690+ Series AC Drive
An Overview of the Drive
1
2-5
Front View (with items removed)
4
5
9
10
7
18
16
6
11
8
19
20
21
13
12
4
14
15
17
3
2
Figure 2-5 690+ AC Drive, Frame F 55 - 90kW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Main drive assembly
Lower front cover retaining screw
Lower front cover
Upper front cover retaining screw
Upper front cover
RS232 programming port (P3)
6901 Keypad
Blank cover (Part Number: LA389836U001)
Keypad port (P3)
Control terminals
690+ Series AC Drive
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Power terminals
Earthing points
Chassis fan
Comms technology box (optional)
Speed feedback technology box (optional)
Future communications option (P8)
Gland plate
Motor thermistor terminals
System Board (optional)
Auxiliary supply terminals (fan)
Brake terminals
2-6
An Overview of the Drive
Control Features
The drive is fully-featured when controlled using the optional Keypad (or a suitable PC
programming tool).
DEFAULT
The `General’ control features below are not user-selectable when the unit is controlled using
the analog and digital inputs and outputs.
General
Protection
Inputs/
Outputs
Output
Frequency
Selectable 0-500Hz, or 0-1000Hz ≥6kHz (V/Hz mode)
Selectable 0-350Hz (closed loop vector mode)
Selectable 0-120Hz (sensorless vector mode)
Switching
Frequency
Constant Torque : selectable 3kHz, 6kHz or 9kHz
depending on power rating
Quadratic Torque : 3kHz for all units
Voltage Boost
0-25% (Fixed or Auto Boost)
Flux Control
1. V/F control with linear or fan law profile
2. Sensorless vector with automatic flux control and slip
compensation
3. Closed loop vector
(with speed feedback Technology Box)
Skip Frequencies
4 skip frequencies with adjustable skip band width
Preset Speeds
8 presets with programmable ramp rates
Stopping Modes
Ramp, ramp with hold, coast, dc injection, fast stop
Ramps
Symmetric or asymmetric ramp up and down rates
Raise/Lower
Programmable MOP function
Jog
Programmable jog speed
Logic Functions
10 programmable 3 input logic function blocks
performing NOT, AND, NAND, OR, NOR and XOR
functions
Value Functions
10 programmable 3 input value function blocks
performing IF, ABS, SWITCH, RATIO, ADD, SUB, RATIO,
TRACK/HOLD, and BINARY DECODE functions
Diagnostics
Full diagnostic and monitoring facilities
Trip Conditions
Output short line to line, and line to earth
Overcurrent > 220%
I*t overload 50-105% (adjustable)
Heatsink overtemperature
Motor Thermistor overtemperature
Overvoltage and undervoltage
Current Limit
Adjustable 50%-150%
180% shock load limit
Voltage/
Frequency Profile
Linear Law
Fan Law
User Defined (v5.1 onwards)
Analog Inputs
4 configurable inputs - voltage or current
Analog Outputs
3 configurable outputs - voltage or current
Digital Inputs
7 configurable 24V dc inputs, 1 fixed 24V dc inputs
Relay Outputs
3 relay contacts (volt-free)
Table 2-1 Control Features
690+ Series AC Drive
An Overview of the Drive
Functional Overview
SYSTEM BOARD
INTERFACE
CONNECTOR
SYSTEM BOARD
INTERFACE
6901
OPERATOR
STATION
INTERFACE
RS232
PROGRAMMING
PORT
TECHNOLOGY OPTION 1
INTERFACE
CONNECTOR
TECHNOLOGY OPTION
INTERFACE
TECHNOLOGY OPTION 2
INTERFACE
CONNECTOR
L1 L2/N L3
26
25
24
23
22
21
CONTROL
TERMINALS
TECHNOLOGY OPTION
INTERFACE
RELAY
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
FILTER
PE
POWER
PROCESSOR
Diode Bridge
DC+
DCDBR
CONTROL
M1
U
M2
V
M3
W
Figure 2-6 Functional Block Diagram (Frame B)
SYSTEM BOARD
INTERFACE
CONNECTOR
SYSTEM BOARD
INTERFACE
TECHNOLOGY OPTION
INTERFACE
TECHNOLOGY OPTION 1
INTERFACE
CONNECTOR
RS232
PROGRAMMING
PORT
6901
OPERATOR
STATION
INTERFACE
TECHNOLOGY OPTION
INTERFACE
TECHNOLOGY OPTION 2
INTERFACE
CONNECTOR
26
25
24
23
22
21
CONTROL
TERMINALS
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
RELAY
MOTOR
THERMISTOR
TERMINALS
(LOCATION VARIES
WITH FRAME SIZE)
L1
L2
Diode Bridge
L3
AC Line Choke
Frames E & F
DC Link
Choke
Frames
C&D
Charging
Circuit
PROCESSOR
DC+
DCDBR+
DBR-
POWER
CONTROL
M1
U
M2
V
M3
W
Figure 2-7 Functional Block Diagram (Frames C, D, E, F)
690+ Series AC Drive
2-7
2-8
An Overview of the Drive
Filter Board (Frame B only)
This two-stage filter consists of common and differential mode elements. It attenuates the drive
noise produced on to the mains supply. Mains supply is applied to terminals L1, L2 (N) and L3.
Power Board/Stack
DC link capacitors smooth the dc voltage output prior to the drive power stage. The IGBT
(Insulated Gate Bi-polar Transistor) output stage converts the dc input to a three phase output
used to drive the motor.
Control Board
Processor
The processor provides for a range of analog and digital inputs and outputs, together with their
reference supplies. For further details refer to Chapter 8: “Technical Specifications” - Control
Terminals.
Technology Options
Comms Technology Box
This is a multi-way connector and processor bus interface with control signals allowing various
Technology Box protocol options to be fitted to the drive.
Speed Feedback Technology Box/Board
Provides speed feedback for HTTL encoders. The option takes the form of a Technology Board
in the case of the 690+ Frame B.
Keypad Interface
This is a non-isolated RS232 serial link for communication with the Keypad. Alternatively, a PC
running Parker SSD Drives’ “ConfigEd Lite” Windows-based configuration software (or some
other suitable PC programming tool) can be used to graphically program and configure the
drive.
System Board Interface
The System Board interface hosts the factory-fitted System Board which enhances the 690+
product in to a fully featured systems drive.
690+ Series AC Drive
Installing the Drive
3-1
INSTALLING THE DRIVE
3
IMPORTANT: Read Chapter 9: “Certification for the Drive” before installing this unit.
Mechanical Installation
Top Cover increased height shown by H2
If wall-mounted, the unit
must be fitted with the
Top Cover firmly screwed
into position.
Replacing an Existing Unit
The lower fixing
centres for Frame
B are now
150.0mm (5.90").
A new dimension
"W2" is introduced
in to the table.
W
W1
D
Control
H
Heat
Sink
H2
H1
If you find it necessary to use existing mounting holes, an
adjustment clamp is available, part number BA469654. Two
of these clamps are required for each drive.
W2
Approximate Frame C shown for illustration purposes
Figure 3-1 Mechanical Dimensions for 690+ Series
Models
Max. Weight
kg/lbs
H
H1
H2
W
W1
W2
D
Fixings
Frame B
4.3/9.5
233.0
(9.17)
223.0
(8.78)
234.0
(9.20)
176.5
(6.95)
129.5
(5.09)
150.0
(5.90)
181.0*
(7.15)
Slot 4.8mm wide
Use M4 fixings
Frame C
9.3/20.5
348.0
(13.70)
335.0
(13.19)
365.0
(14.37)
201.0
(7.91)
150.0
(5.90)
150.0
(5.90)
208.0
(8.19)
Slot 7mm wide
Use M5 or M6
fixings.
Frame D
18.4/40.6
453.0
(17.80)
440.0
(17.30)
471.0
(18.50)
252.0
(9.92)
150.0
(5.90)
150.0
(5.90)
245.0
(9.65)
Slot 7mm wide
Use M5 or M6
fixings.
Frame E
32.5/72
668.6
(26.30)
630.0
(24.80)
676.0
(26.60)
257.0
(10.10)
150.0
(5.90)
150.0
(5.90)
312
(12.30)
Use M6 fixings
Frame F
41/90.4
720.0
(28.30)
700.0
Not
257.0
(27.60) applicable (10.10)
150.0
(5.90)
150.0
(5.90)
355.0
(14.00)
Use M6 fixings
* 197.0 (8.04) when unit fitted with System Board
All dimensions are in millimetres (inches)
Note: For details of a through-panel mounting option for Frames D & E refer to pages 3-6 and
3-8 respectively.
Mounting the Drive
The unit must be mounted vertically on a solid, flat, vertical surface. It can be wall-mounted, or
mounted inside a suitable cubicle, depending upon the required level of EMC compliance - refer
to Chapter 8: “Technical Specifications”.
Ventilation
The drive gives off heat in normal operation and must therefore be mounted to allow the free
flow of air through the ventilation slots and heatsink. Maintain minimum clearances for
ventilation as given in the tables below to ensure adequate cooling of the drive, and that heat
690+ Series AC Drive
3-2
Installing the Drive
generated by other adjacent equipment is not transmitted to the drive. Be aware that other
equipment may have its own clearance requirements. When mounting two or more 690+ units
together, these clearances are additive. Ensure that the mounting surface is normally cool.
Minimum Air Clearance (Frame B)
Cubicle-Mount Product/Application (Frame B)
(Europe: IP2x, USA/Canada: Open Type)
The drive, without the top cover fitted, must be mounted in a suitable cubicle.
J
K
L
Control
Heat
Sink
M
AIR FLOW
Figure 3-2 Air Clearance for a Cubicle-Mount Product/Application
Model Recognition
Frame B
Clearances for Standard Product without Top Cover (mm)
J
K
L
M
15
15
70
80
Wall-Mount Product/Application (Frame B)
(Europe: IP2x plus IP4x top surface protection, USA/Canada: Type 1)
Wall-mounted 690+ units must have the top cover correctly fitted. The top cover fixing screw
has a maximum tightening torque of 1.5Nm (1.2Nm recommended). Refer to Chapter 9:
“Certification for the Drive” - Direct Wall-Mountable Models.
K
J
Top Cover
L
Control
Heat
Sink
M
AIR FLOW
Figure 3-3 Air Clearance for a Wall-Mount Product/Application
Model Recognition
Frame B
Clearances for Standard Product fitted with Top Cover (mm)
J
K
L
M
15
15
70
80
690+ Series AC Drive
Installing the Drive
3-3
Minimum Air Clearance (Frame C)
Cubicle-Mount Product/Application (Frame C)
(Europe: IP2x, USA/Canada: Open Type).
The drive, without the top cover fitted, must be mounted in a suitable cubicle.
J
K
L
Heat
Sink
Control
M
FORCED AIR FLOW
Figure 3-4 Air Clearance for a Cubicle-Mount Product/Application
Model Recognition
Frame C
Clearances for Standard Product without Top Cover (mm)
J
K
L
M
15
15
70
70
Wall-Mount Product/Application (Frame C)
(Europe: IP2x plus IP4x top surface protection, USA/Canada: Type 1).
Wall-mounted 690+ units must have the top cover correctly fitted. The top cover fixing screw
has a maximum tightening torque of 1.5Nm (1.2Nm recommended).
Top Cover
K
J
L
Control
FORCED AIR FLOW
Heat
Sink
M
Figure 3-5 Air Clearance for a Wall-Mount Product/Application
Model Recognition
Frame C
690+ Series AC Drive
Clearances for Standard Product fitted with Top Cover (mm)
J
K
L
M
20
15
70
70
3-4
Installing the Drive
Through-Panel Mount Product/Application (Frame C)
(Europe: IP2x, USA/Canada: Open Type).
The drive, without the top cover fitted, can be mounted in a suitable cubicle.
J
K
panel
N
L
Control
FORCED AIR FLOW
M
Heat
Sink
P
Figure 3-6 Air Clearance for a Through-Panel Mount Product/Application
Model Recognition
Clearances for Through-Panel Mount
Standard Product (mm)
Through-Panel
Dimensions
J
K
L
M
N
P
Frame C
20
15
70
70
125
82
Through-Panel Mount
Bracket Assembly (Frame C)
The through-panel kit is available as a separate
item, part number LA465034U003.
Through-panel mounting a drive in a cubicle
allows you to use a smaller cubicle because
much of the heat generated by the drive is
dissipated outside the cubicle.
• Cut the panel aperture to the dimensions
given in the drawing at the end of this
chapter.
• Screw the top and bottom brackets to the
drive as shown, torque to 3Nm. When in
position, these complete a mating face for the
panel around the drive.
• Fit the top and bottom self-adhesive gasket
material to the brackets making sure that the
gasket covers the gap between the bracket
and heatsink along the top and bottom edge
of the drive.
panel
• Fit a gasket to each side of the drive to
complete the gasket seal. Ensure a complete
seal is made; 2 extra side gaskets are
provided.
• Offer up the drive to the panel and secure.
Refer to Through-Panel Cutout Details,
page 3-9.
690+ Series AC Drive
Installing the Drive
3-5
Minimum Air Clearance (Frame D)
Cubicle-Mount Product/Application (Frame D)
(Europe: IP2x, USA/Canada: Open Type).
The drive, without the top cover fitted, must be mounted in a suitable cubicle.
K
J
L
M
ISOLATED FORCED AIR FLOWS
Figure 3-7 Air Clearance for a Cubicle-Mount Product/Application
Model Recognition
Frame D
Clearances for Standard Product without Top Cover (mm)
J
K
L
M
15 LHS, 5 RHS
25
70
70
Wall-Mount Product/Application (Frame D)
(Europe: IP2x plus IP4x top surface protection, USA/Canada: Type 1).
Wall-mounted 690+ units must have the top cover correctly fitted. The top cover fixing screw
has a maximum tightening torque of 1.5Nm (1.2Nm recommended).
Top Cover
K
J
L
M
ISOLATED FORCED AIR FLOWS
Figure 3-8 Air Clearance for a Wall-Mount Product/Application
Model Recognition
Frame D
690+ Series AC Drive
Clearances for Standard Product fitted with Top Cover (mm)
J
K
L
M
15 LHS, 5 RHS
25
70
70
3-6
Installing the Drive
Through-Panel Mount Product/Application (Frame D)
(Europe: IP2x, USA/Canada: Open Type).
The drive, without the top cover fitted, can be mounted in a suitable cubicle.
panel
N
K
J
L
P
M
ISOLATED FORCED AIR FLOWS
Figure 3-9 Air Clearance for a Through-Panel Mount Product/Application
Model Recognition
Frame D
Clearances for Through-Panel Mount Standard
Product (mm)
Through-Panel
Dimensions
J
K
L
M
N
P
15 LHS, 5 RHS
25
100
100
141
104
Through-Panel Mount
Bracket Assembly (Frame D)
The through-panel kit is available as a separate
item, part number LA465048U003.
Through-panel mounting a drive in a cubicle
allows you to use a smaller cubicle because
much of the heat generated by the drive is
dissipated outside the cubicle.
• Cut the panel aperture to the dimensions
given in the drawing at the end of this
chapter.
• Screw the top and bottom brackets to the
drive as shown, torque to 4Nm. When in
position, these complete a mating face for the
panel around the drive.
• Fit the top and bottom gaskets to the panel,
aligning the gasket holes with the holes in
the panel for fixing the drive. Fit two side
gaskets around the panel aperture so that an
air-tight seal will be made between the drive
and the panel; 2 extra side gaskets are
provided.
panel
• Offer up the drive to the panel and secure.
Refer to Through-Panel Cutout Details,
page 3-9.
690+ Series AC Drive
Installing the Drive
3-7
Minimum Air Clearance (Frame E)
Cubicle-Mount Product/Application (Frame E)
(Europe: IP2x, USA/Canada: Open Type).
The drive, without the top cover fitted, must be mounted in a suitable cubicle.
J
K
L
M
ISOLATED FORCED AIR FLOWS
Figure 3-10 Air Clearance for a Cubicle-Mount Product/Application
Model Recognition
Clearances for Standard Product without Top Cover (mm)
Frame E
J
K
L
M
0 (zero)
25
70
70
Wall-Mount Product/Application (Frame E)
(Europe: IP2x plus IP4x top surface protection, USA/Canada: Type 1).
Wall-mounted 690+ units must have the top cover correctly fitted. The top cover fixing screw
has a maximum tightening torque of 1.5Nm (1.2Nm recommended).
Top Cover
K
J
L
M
ISOLATED FORCED AIR FLOWS
Figure 3-11 Air Clearance for a Wall-Mount Product/Application
Model Recognition
Frame E
690+ Series AC Drive
Clearances for Standard Product fitted with Top Cover (mm)
J
K
L
M
0 (zero)
25
70
70
3-8
Installing the Drive
Through-Panel Mount Product/Application (Frame E)
(Europe: IP2x, USA/Canada: Open Type).
The drive, without the top cover fitted, can be through-panel mounted in a suitable cubicle.
J
K
panel
N
L
P
ISOLATED FORCED AIR FLOWS
M
Figure 3-12 Air Clearance for a Through-Panel Mount Product/Application
Model Recognition
Frame E
Clearances for Through-Panel Mount
Standard Product (mm)
Through-Panel Dimensions
J
K
L
M
N
P
0 (zero)
25
70
70
180
129 (panel thickness
not included, max.
thickness 5mm
Through-Panel Mount Bracket
Assembly (Frame E)
The through-panel kit is available as a
separate item, part number LA465058U003.
Through-panel mounting a drive in a cubicle
allows you to use a smaller cubicle because
much of the heat generated by the drive is
dissipated outside the cubicle.
• Cut the panel aperture to the dimensions
given in the drawing at the end of this
chapter.
• Lay the drive on its back.
• Lightly screw the top and bottom brackets
to the drive as shown.
• Fit the two side brackets to complete the
frame and tighten all screws securely.
• Fit the self-adhesive gasket material to the
mating face of the drive to produce an airtight seal between the drive and the panel.
• Offer up the drive to the panel and secure.
Refer to Through-Panel Cutout Details,
page 3-9.
panel
690+ Series AC Drive
Installing the Drive
Through-Panel Cutout Details
690+ Series AC Drive
3-9
3-10
Installing the Drive
Minimum Air Clearance (Frame F)
Note:
There is no through panel-mount capability for the 690F.
Cubicle-Mount Product/Application (Frame F)
(Europe: IP00 or IP20, USA/Canada: Open Type).
WARNING!
The drive must be mounted in a cubicle that is suitable for the environment.
The drive is IP00 or IP20 and hence requires the further protection provided by the
cubicle to avoid personal injury.
J
K
L
Control
Heat
Sink
M
Figure 3-13 Air Clearance for a Cubicle-Mount Product/Application
Model Recognition
Frame F
Clearances for Standard Product (mm)
J
K
L
M
0 (zero)
25
70
70
Duct Kit
A Duct kit, Part Number LA466717U003 is available for the 690+ Frame F drive.
The installation diagram is provided on the following page.
Caution
Protect any equipment in the cubicle from swarf etc.
Ensure all equipment is isolated.
♦
The duct length determines the vertical position of the drive in the cubicle. Drill the lower
mounting panel hole centres for the drive at 976mm from the top of the cubicle. There is a
generous tolerance of ±4mm.
♦
Cut-out the hole for the duct directly above where the drive sits. Project the position of the
drive mounting surface inside the cubicle and mark it on the roof. From the drawing, you
can calculate that the cut-out is made 8.5mm in front of the drive mounting surface (the
centres for the cowling fixing holes will be 7.5mm behind the drive mounting surface).
Draw the cut-out shape, check its position, and cut it out.
♦
Because of the weight of the drive, it may be better to secure the drive in the cubicle first,
and lower the duct into the cubicle from above.
♦
Fix the duct to the drive using the M4 fasteners.
♦
Fit the gasket between the duct cowling and the top of the cubicle to provide a good seal.
Drill through and secure all this with the M6 fasteners.
690+ Series AC Drive
Installing the Drive
Duct Kit Installation Diagram
690+ Series AC Drive
3-11
3-12
Installing the Drive
Electrical Installation
IMPORTANT: Please read the Safety Information on page Cont. 3 & 4 before proceeding.
WARNING!
Ensure that all wiring is electrically isolated and cannot be made “live”
unintentionally by other personnel.
Note: Refer to Chapter 8: “Technical Specifications” for additional Cabling Requirements and
Terminal Block Wire Sizes.
signal/control cable
(sensitive)
(noisy)
power
supply
cable
line
choke
(clean)
external
ac
supply
EMC
filter
fuse or suitable
circuit breaker
(RCD not
recommended)
(noisy)
inverter
EMC
motor
output
filter
(noisy)
brake resistor
motor
choke
motor
cable
motor
(noisy)
Frame B only:
internal ac supply EMC filter
(the external ac supply EMC filter
must not be used with the
internal filter)
Figure 3-14 Cabling Requirements
Cables are considered to be electrically sensitive, clean or noisy. You should already have
planned your cable routes with respect to segregating these cables for EMC compliance.
If not, refer to Chapter 9: “Certification for the Drive”.
Gland Plate Details
Frame B
The gland plate is fitted with grommets. Alternatively, the supplied screen
termination clamps may be fitted.
The gland plate holes accept the following gland sizes:
• metric M20, PG16 and American ½” NPT cable gland sizes.
Frame C
The gland plate holes accept the following gland sizes:
• 22.8mm to accept metric M20, PG16 and American ½” NPT cable gland sizes
• 28.6mm to accept M25, PG21 and American ¾” NPT cable gland sizes
Frame D
The gland plate holes accept the following gland sizes:
• 28.6mm to accept metric M20, PG16 and American ½” NPT cable gland sizes
• 37.3mm to accept metric M32, PG29 and American 1" NPT
Frame E
The gland plate holes accept the following gland sizes:
• 22.8mm to accept metric M20, PG16 and American ½” NPT cable gland sizes
• 28.6mm to accept metric M25, PG21 and American ¾” NPT cable gland sizes
• 47.3mm to accept metric M40, PG36 and American 1¼” NPT cable gland sizes
• 54.3mm to accept metric M50, PG42 and American 1½" NPT cable gland sizes
Frame F
The gland plate holes accept the following gland sizes:
• 22.8mm to accept metric M20, PG16 and American ½” NPT cable gland sizes
• 28.6mm to accept M25, PG21 and American ¾” NPT cable gland sizes
690+ Series AC Drive
Installing the Drive
3-13
Cable Gland Requirements
Use a metal gland to connect to the internally earthed gland plate. It must be capable of securing
a 360 degree screened connection to give EMC compliance. A 360 degree screened connection
can be achieved as shown.
Figure 3-15 360 Degree Screened Connection
Protective Earth (PE) Connections
The unit must be permanently earthed according to EN 50178 - see below. Protect the
incoming mains supply using a suitable fuse or circuit breaker (circuit breaker types RCD,
ELCB, GFCI are not recommended). Refer to “Earth Fault Monitoring Systems”, page 3-30.
IMPORTANT: The drive is only suitable for earth referenced supplies (TN) when fitted with an internal
filter. External filters are available for use on TN and IT (non-earth referenced) supplies.
The unit must be permanently earthed according to EN 50178:
• A cross-section conductor of at least 10mm² is required. This can be achieved either by using a single
conductor (PE) or by laying a second conductor though separate terminals (PE2 where provided) and
electrically in parallel.
Refer to Chapter 9: “Certification for the Drive” - EMC Installation Options.
Motor Connections
1
screen termination clamp
(Frame B only)
(can be used with all cables
but may not necessarily
provide for EMC compliance)
PE
EMC connection
2
metal cable gland
PE
screen
EMC
connection
M
gland plate
metal gland must
have 360 degree
screened connection
for EMC compliance
armoured
power wiring
to motor
power wiring
to motor
M
EMC
connection
International
grounding symbol
PE
3
standard fitment
rubber grommet
(non-EMC compliant)
4
earth clamp connection
(Frame C only)
PE
fit cup washer
over cable screen
screen
PE
rubber
grommet
rubber
grommet
gland plate
power wiring
to motor
screened
power wiring
to motor
EMC
connection
M
690+ Series AC Drive
M
Screened motor connections to be
made using a cable gland with a
360 degree screened connection
Protective Earth
3-14
Installing the Drive
Power Wiring Connections (Frame B)
L1
L2/N
DC+
DBR
DC-
M1/U
M2/V
MOT/TEMP
M3/W
brake resistor
PE1
PE2
motor thermistor
power supply
motor
(maximum motor cable3length 50m)
1
2
3
Single Phase
Input
L1
DC+
L3
L2
DBR
DC-
M1/U
M2/V
Brake resistor and cable
must be screened
if not fitted inside
a control cubicle
MOT/TEMP
M3/W
brake resistor
PE1
motor thermistor
motor
(maximum 1motor cable 3length 50m)
power supply
Three
PE2
1 1 2Input
Phase
1.
Remove the terminal cover retaining screws and lift off the terminal cover.
2.
Feed the power supply and motor cables into the drive through the metal gland plate using
the correct cable entries, and connect to the power terminals. Tighten all terminals to the
correct tightening torque, refer to the Terminal Tightening Torques table.
Power Wiring Connections (Frame C)
L1
L2
L3
PE1
3PH
DC+
DC-
M1/U
M2/V M3/W
MOT/TEMP
DBR+ DBR-
PE2
PE
L1
L2
L3
Brake resistor and cable must be screened
M
if not fitted inside a control cubicle
All screens terminated using a gland at the gland plate
brake
resistor
motor thermistor
1.
Remove the terminal cover retaining screws and lift off the terminal cover.
2.
Lift the internal power terminal shield.
3.
Feed the power supply and motor cables into the drive through the metal gland plate using
the correct cable entries, and connect to the power terminals. Tighten all terminals to the
correct tightening torque, refer to the Terminal Tightening Torques table.
Lower the internal power terminal shield.
4.
690+ Series AC Drive
Installing the Drive
3-15
Power Wiring Connections (Frame D)
Power Board
L1
L2
L3
DC+ DC-
M1/U M2/V M3/W DBR+ DBR-
3PH
brake
resistor
PE2
PE1
PE
L1
L2
MOT/TEMP
motor thermistor
L3
Brake resistor and cable must be screened
M
if not fitted inside a control cubicle
All screens terminated using a gland at the gland plate
1.
Remove the terminal cover retaining screws and lift off the terminal cover.
2.
Lift the internal power terminal shield.
3.
Feed the power supply and motor cables into the drive through the metal gland plate using
the correct cable entries, and connect to the power terminals. Tighten all terminals to the
correct tightening torque, refer to the Terminal Tightening Torques table.
4.
Lower the internal power terminal shield.
Power Wiring Connections (Frame E)
L1
L2
L3
DC+
DC-
M1/U M2/V
PE
L1
L2
MOT/
TEMP
DBR+ DBR-
brake
resistor
PE1
3PH
M3/W
motor
thermistor
L3
Brake resistor and cable must be screened
M
if not fitted inside a control cubicle
All screens terminated using a gland at the gland plate
Note: The standard Frame E terminals are not intended for flat busbar. A Power Terminal
adaptor is available to enable wiring with flat busbar, part number BE465483.
1.
Remove the terminal cover retaining screws and lift off the terminal cover.
2.
Feed the power supply and motor cables into the drive through the metal gland plate using the correct
cable entries, and connect to the power terminals. Tighten all terminals to the correct tightening
torque, refer to the Terminal Tightening Torques table.
690+ Series AC Drive
3-16
Installing the Drive
Power Wiring Connections (Frame F)
L1
L2
L3
DC+
DC-
M1/U
M2/V
M3/W
DBR+ DBR-
auxiliary
supply
(fan)
brake
resistor
MOT/
TEMP
PE1
3PH
PE
L1
L2
L3
M
motor thermistor
(on control board
support bracket)
Terminate all control cable screens using a gland at the gland plate
Bond the motor cable screen to the drive and motor, as close as possible
to both terminals
Note: For cooling fan details, refer to Chapter 8: "Technical Specifications" - Cooling Fan
(Frame F).
Note: The standard Frame F terminals are not intended for flat busbar. A Power Terminal
adaptor is available to enable wiring with flat busbar, part number BE465483.
1.
Remove the terminal cover retaining screws and lift off the terminal cover.
2.
Feed the motor cables into the cubicle using the correct cable entry glands ensuring the
screen is connected (see Figure 3-14 Cabling Requirements, page 3-12).
Feed the power supply and motor cables into the drive through the large aperture in the
metal gland plate and connect to the power terminals. Tighten all terminals to the correct
tightening torque, refer to the Terminal Tightening Torques table.
3.
Motor Thermistor Connections
This input is provided to detect over-temperature in motors fitted with
an internal thermistor. There is no polarity to the thermistor
connections.
IMPORTANT: This input provides “Basic” insulation only to the SELV control
circuits and assumes the motor has “Basic” insulation to the
windings/mains circuits.
MMI Menu Map
1
SETUP
2
TRIPS
3
I/O TRIPS
INVERT THERMIST
The thermistor type supported is PTC `Type A’ as defined in IEC 34-11 Part 2. The drive uses
the following resistance thresholds:
Rising temperature trip resistance:
1650 to 4000Ω
Falling temperature trip reset resistance:
750 to 1650Ω
If the motor is not fitted with an internal thermistor, you should disable the thermistor trip
function either by setting INVERT THERMIST to be TRUE, or by linking the thermistor
terminals.
690+ Series AC Drive
Installing the Drive
3-17
Control Wiring Connections
All 690+ Series AC Drives have the same control wiring connections.
Note: Use screened control cables to comply with EMC requirements. All screens terminated
using a gland at the gland plate.
1.
Feed the control cables into the drive through the metal gland plate and connect to the
control terminals. The diagram below shows the typical control connections required for
operation as a simple speed controller.
Each bank of cables (1-10, 11-20 and 21-26) must be secured together with a cable tie as
close to the terminals as possible.
Refit and secure the terminal cover using the retaining screws.
2.
IMPORTANT: The control board 0V must be connected to protective earth outside of the product to
meet EMC and safety requirements.
Note: Refer to Chapter 8: “Technical Specifications” for Control Terminal information
TB3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DOUT1_A
DOUT1_B
DOUT2_A
DOUT2_B
DOUT3_A
DOUT3_B
1
TB2
0V
DIN1 (RUN FORWARD)
DIN2 (RUN REVERSE)
DIN3 (NOT STOP)
DIN4 (REMOTE REVERSE)
DIN5 (JOG)
DIN6
DIN7 (REMOTE TRIP RESET)
DIN8 (EXT TRIP)
+24VC
0V
AIN1 (SPEED SETPOINT)
AIN2 (SETPOINT TRIM)
AIN3
AIN4
AOUT1 (RAMP OUTPUT)
AOUT2
AOUT3
+10V REF
-10V REF
TB1
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24 25 26
10k
Speed Setpoint
HEALTH
220V AC 3A maximum
into a resistive load (default)
Figure 3-16 Typical Connection to the Control Terminals
690+ Series AC Drive
RUNNING
3-18
Installing the Drive
Terminal Block Acceptance Sizes
Wire sizes for Europe should be chosen with respect to the operating conditions and your local
National Electrical Safety Installation Requirements. Local wiring regulations always take
precedence. For North American UL wire sizes refer to Chapter 9: “Certification for the Drive”
- Requirements for UL Compliance.
Product Code
Power Terminals
(minimum/maximum acceptance for aperture)
Control Terminals
including Thermistor
Terminals
System Board
Terminals
(option)
690PB/...
0.75 / 6mm2
2.5 mm2
2.5 mm2
690PC/...
0.75 / 10mm2 (*16mm2)
2.5 mm2
2.5 mm2
690PD/0150/...
690PD/0180/...
690PD/0220/...
690PD/0300/...
2.5 / 16mm2 (* 25mm2)
2.5 mm2
2.5 mm2
2.5 / 25mm2 (* 35mm2)
2.5 mm2
2.5 mm2
Solid
Stranded
690PE/...
2
16 / 50mm
25 / 50mm2 (* 70mm2)
2.5 mm2
2.5 mm2
690PF/...
25/120mm2
35 / 95mm2 (*120mm2)
2.5 mm2
2.5 mm2
Note: The standard Frame E and Frame F terminals are not intended for flat busbar. A Power Terminal adaptor is
available to enable wiring with flat busbar, part number BE465483.
* The larger wire sizes can be used provided a crimp is fitted to the wire
Terminal Tightening Torques
Frame Size
Model Recognition
Product Code Catalog Code
(Block 2 & 3) (Block 2 & 3)
Thermistor
& fan
supply
Power
Terminals
Brake
Terminals
Ground
Terminals
Frame B
All
All
N/A
1.04Nm
(9.2lb-in)
1.04Nm
(9.2lb-in)
1.5Nm
(13.3 lb-in)
Frame C 230V
0055/230
0075/230
0007/230
0010/230
N/A
1.35Nm
(12 lb-in)
1.35Nm
(12 lb-in)
2.5Nm
(22 lb-in)
Frame C 400/500V
0055/400
0055/500
0007/460
N/A
1.35Nm
(12 lb-in)
1.35Nm
(12 lb-in)
2.5Nm
(22 lb-in)
1.35Nm
(12 lb-in)
2.5Nm
(22 lb-in)
1.35Nm
(12 lb-in)
enclosed terminal type
0075/400
0110/400
0150/400
0075/500
0110/500
0150/500
0010/460
0015/460
0020C/460
N/A
Frame D
All
All
N/A
4Nm
(35 lb-in)
4Nm
(35 lb-in)
4.5Nm
(40 lb-in)
Frame E
All
All
0.7Nm
(6.1 lb-in)
6-8Nm
(53-70 lb-in)
6-8Nm
(53-70 lb-in)
6-8Nm
(53-70 lb-in)
Frame F
All
All
0.7Nm
(6.1 lb-in)
15-20Nm
(132-177 lb-in)
0.7Nm
(6.1 lb-in)
42Nm
(375 lb-in)
Frame C 400/500V
1.8Nm
(16 lb-in)
open terminal type
690+ Series AC Drive
Installing the Drive
3-19
Optional Equipment
System Board
Front View (with items removed)
With this factory-fitted expansion board, the
690+ drive is suitable for high-end web
processing and mini PLC replacement
applications.
The following features are provided:
• Converts AIN1-4 in to high resolution
(12-bit plus sign) non-isolated analog
inputs
• 5 configurable fully-isolated digital
inputs/outputs (for PLC applications),
individually selectable to input or output
• Supplies variable voltage, isolated encoder
power supply
system
board
• Decoding logic to interface the encoder to
the microprocessor
Frame B illustrated
• Master Encoder Input (isolated HTTL), A,
B and Z
• Slave Encoder Input (isolated HTTL), A, B and Z
• Encoder Re-Transmit (isolated HTTL), A, B and Z
External Power Supply
An external 0V and 24V dc (±10%) 1A power supply is required for the board to operate and
supply the digital I/O and encoder power supply at maximum loading.
Encoder Input Specification
B
1
2 3 4 5 6
+24V External
Power Supply
1
C
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SW1 SW2 1
Volts set
by SW1
and SW2
positions
2 3 4 5 6
SW1/SW2 Switch Settings
SW2
OFF ON
SW1
24V 18V
OFF
ON
12V
5V
Figure 3-17 System Board Terminals
690+ Series AC Drive
Repeat Encoder Output A
Repeat Encoder Output /A
Repeat Encoder Output B
Repeat Encoder Output /B
Repeat Encoder Output Z
Repeat Encoder Ouput /Z
A
ON ON
Slave Encoder A
Slave Encoder /A
Slave Encoder B
Slave Encoder /B
Slave Encoder Z
Slave Encoder /Z
External 24V In
Reference Encoder A
Reference Encoder /A
Reference Encoder B
Reference Encoder /B
Reference Encoder Z
Reference Encoder /Z
Encoder Supply Out +ve
Encoder Supply Out -ve
250kHz
≤10mA per channel
Two differential channels in quadrature
3V ±1
Maximum load = 200mA.
Voltage adjustable 12-24V by switches SW1 & SW2
External 0V
DIGIO11
DIGIO12
DIGIO13
DIGIO14
DIGIO15
Maximum Pulse Rate
Receiver Current
Input Format
Differential Input Threshold
Encoder Supply
D
1
2 3 4 5 6
3-20
Installing the Drive
Encoder Connections
Take special care wiring the encoders to the system board due to the low level of the signals.
All wiring to the system board should be made in screened cable. Use cable with an overall
screen and a screen over each individual pair. To ensure compliance with the EMC Directive the
overall cable screen should be connected to the encoder body and to the drive chassis.
Recommended cable (pairs individually screened):
Belden equivalent 8777
Parker SSD Drives Part Number CM052666
Differential Encoders
System Board Terminal B
External
+24V In A
2
1
/A
3
System Board Terminal D
System Board Terminal C
Encoder
MASTER
supply
B /B Z /Z + 6 7 8 9
4 5
Drive
chassis
A
1
/A
2
SLAVE
B /B Z
3 4 5
/Z
6
A
/A
B /B Z
/Z
Drive
chassis
A
1
REPEAT OUT
B /B Z
/A
2
3 4 5
2
A
3
/A
/Z
6
Drive
chassis
Encoder
supply
A
Z /Z + -/0V
supply
REFERENCE ENCODER
/A
B /B
+ -/0V
supply
SLAVE ENCODER
4 5 6
B /B Z
MASTER
7
/Z
Master
drive
chassis
Single-Ended Encoders
System Board Terminal B
External
+24V In A
2
1
/A
3
MASTER
B /B
4 5
System Board Terminal C
Encoder
Drive
supply chassis
Z /Z + 6 7 8 9
A
1
/A
2
SLAVE
B /B Z
3 4 5
/Z
6
System Board Terminal D
Drive
chassis
A
1
REPEAT OUT
B /B Z
/A
2
3 4 5
2
A
3
/A
/Z
6
Drive
chassis
Encoder
supply
A
+ -/0V -/0V
supply
REFERENCE ENCODER
B
Z
+ -/0V A
supply
B
Z
-/0V
SLAVE ENCODER
4 5 6
B /B Z
MASTER
7
/Z
Master
drive
chassis
Parker SSD Drives Approved Encoders
Operation with 5V encoders is not recommended. We recommend using 10-24V differential
encoders, as shown below.
Recommended Encoder
(12mm bore)
Alternative Encoders
(20mm bore)
Hengstler:
Parker SSD Drives Part Number:
Hengstler:
Parker SSD Drives Part Number:
RI 58TD//2048ED.37IF
DD464475U012
RI 76TD/2048ED-4N20IF
DD464475U020
Encoders are available from Hengstler in other accuracy’s such as 500 lines/rev or 2000
lines/rev to suit the application.
690+ Series AC Drive
Installing the Drive
3-21
Technology Options
Note: Optional equipment is fitted to
Frames C, D, E and F in very
similar ways, but because of its
compact size, Frame B is a
special case.
Speed Feedback Option
cable tie loop
for restraining
speed feedback
board cables
Remote
Operator
Station
or
Comms
Option
Frame B illustrated
Top Cover
Remote
Operator
Station
Speed
Feedback
Option
Frame D illustrated
690+ Series AC Drive
Comms
Option
Remote
Operator
Station
3-22
Installing the Drive
WARNING!
Isolate the drive before fitting or removing the option.
There are two Technology Options:
1. Speed Feedback
2. Communications
These are plugged into the two positions, as illustrated on the previous page.
All Technology Options are designed as plug-in technology boxes, except for the Frame B
Speed Feedback option which is a plug-in board.
You can operate the drive with the Speed Feedback and/or Communications Technology
Options, but you cannot use two options of the same kind.
Note: Refer to the appropriate Technology Option Technical Manual for further information.
Technology Box
Remove a technology box option by carefully pushing a
long screwdriver (for instance) under the option and gently
prising it out. The pins are protected by the option
moulding.
Ø
×
Speed Feedback Technology Board (Frame B)
Caution
Observe static control precautions when handling and installing the board.
Fit the technology option by pushing into location until
the catches click in position.
finger hold
Remove the Speed Feedback Board by pushing in the
catches and pulling the board away from the drive using
the finger holds shown to grip.
catch
catch
finger hold
Item
Part No: Frame B
Part No: Frames C to F
TB1 Comms Technology Option
Plug-in field bus communications interface
options.
Profibus
Profibus Technology Option manual
RS485/RS422/Modbus/EI Bisynch
RS485 Technology Option manual
Link
Link Technology Option manual
Device Net
Device Net Technology Option Manual
6053/PROF
HA463561U001
6053/EI00
HA463560U001
6053/LINK
HA470237
6053/DNET
HA463575U001
6055/PROF
HA463561U001
6055/EI00
HA463560U001
6055/LINK
HA470237
6055/DNET
HA463575U001
TB2 Speed Feedback Technology Option
Plug-in speed feedback HTTL Encoder option.
• Technology Board (Frame B)
• Technology Box (Frames C, D, E & F)
LA467461
6054/HTTL
690+ Series AC Drive
Installing the Drive
3-23
Fitting the Remote 6901 Keypad
The 6052 Mounting Kit is required to remote-mount a 6901 Keypad. It is possible to:
• Remote-mount the drive-mounted Keypad using the port(s) illustrated
• Remote-mount an additional Keypad in the lower port (not Frame B) - in this case, both
Keypads are fully functional
• Remote-mount both Keypads as illustrated (not Frame B) - in this case, both Keypads are
fully functional
You can also replace any Keypad for a PC running ConfigEd Lite (or other suitable PC
programming tool) in all of the options above. Refer to the Software Product Manual: “Serial
Communications”.
6052 Mounting Kit Parts for the Remote Keypad
6
6052 Mounting Kit Tools required : No. 2 Posidrive screwdriver
1
1
1
Steward 28A2025-OAO
4
No. 6 x 12mm
Assembly
Procedure
Remove the factory-fitted
P3 lead from the P3 port
under the terminal cover
which connects the fitted
keypad. Fit the ferrite to
one end of the 3m
connector lead, passing the
cable through the ferrite
twice as shown below. Plug
the 3m connector lead from
the remote-mounted
keypad into the P3 port
(see the diagram on the
previous page) ensuring
that the ferrite is at the
drive end of the lead and is
as close to the drive as
1
1
3m, 4-way
2
3
5
4
RS232 / REM OP STA
104mm
Template
48.2
Figure 3-18 Mounting Dimensions for the
Remote-Mounted Keypad 6901
690+ Series AC Drive
4.0
cut-out
27
30
50.5
An actual size template is provided with
Keypad/6052 Mounting Kit.
10.5
40
Cutout Dimensions
132.5
possible.
86.5
96.4
3-24
Installing the Drive
Top Cover
This can be fitted to wall-mounted 690+ units to give improved compliance ratings. Refer to
Chapter 8: “Technical Specifications” - Environmental Details.
The top cover must be correctly fitted and secured with screw(s).
Note: The maximum operating temperature of the drive is reduced by fitting the top cover. Refer
to Chapter 8: “Technical Specifications” - Environmental Details.
Item
Part Number
Top Cover Kit (UL Type 1 / IP4x), including screws
A protective cover fitted to wall-mounted units to give improved
compliance ratings
•
Frame B
LA467452
•
Frame C
LA465034U002
•
Frame D
LA465048U002
•
Frame E
LA465058U002
External Brake Resistor
Three standard power resistors are
available from Parker SSD Drives.
These resistors should be mounted
on a heatsink (back panel) and
covered to prevent injury from
burning.
flying leads
a
b
L2
D
b
W
a
L3
H
L1
Part Number
CZ389853
CZ463068
CZ388396
Models used on
Frame B
Frames B, C, D, E, F
Frames C, D, E, F
Resistance
100Ω
56Ω
36Ω
Maximum Wattage
100W
200W
500W
5 second rating
500%
500%
500%
3 second rating
833%
833%
833%
1 second rating
2500%
2500%
2500%
Dimensions L1 (mm)
165
165
335
L2 (mm)
152
146
316
L3 (mm)
125
125
295
W (mm)
22
30
30
H (mm)
41
60
60
D (mm)
4.3
5.3
5.3
a (mm)
10
13
13
b (mm)
12
17
17
Flying lead length (mm)
500
500
500
Electrical Connection
M4 spade
M5 spade
M5 ring
690+ Series AC Drive
Installing the Drive
3-25
North American Standard Dynamic Braking Resistor Kits
The Dynamic Braking Resistor kits were designed for stopping a motor at full load current from
base speed with two times motor inertia, three times in rapid succession in accordance with
NEMA ICS 3-302.62 Dynamic Braking Stop option.
Hp
3
5
Hp
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
230Vac dynamic braking resistor kit
with cover
CONSTANT & VARIABLE TORQUE
Ohms
kW
Catalog No.
45
0.28
CZ470637
27
0.35
CZ353192
460 VAC Dynamic Braking Resistor
Kit with Cover
CONSTANT TORQUE
Ohms
kW
Catalog No.
100
0.1
CZ389853
100
0.26
CZ353179
100
0.2
CZ353179
54
0.7
CZ353181
54
0.84
CZ353181
30
1.26
CZ353182
30
1.17
CZ353182
30
1.56
CZ353182
26
2.03
CZ353183
18.4
2.36
CZ353185
12
2.0
CZ353186
9
3.39
CZ353188
7
3.39
CZ353189
5.5
3.39
CZ353190
5.5
3.39
CZ353190
460 VAC Dynamic Braking Resistor
Kit with Cover
VARIABLE TORQUE
Ohms
kW
Catalog No.
100
0.1
CZ389853
100
0.26
CZ353179
100
0.2
CZ353179
100
0.7
CZ353179
54
0.84
CZ353181
54
1.26
CZ353181
30
1.17
CZ353182
30
1.56
CZ353182
30
2.03
CZ353182
26
2.36
CZ353183
18.4
2.92
CZ353185
12
3.39
CZ353186
9
3.39
CZ353188
7
3.39
CZ353189
5.5
3.39
CZ353190
Brake Resistor Selection
Note: Parker SSD Drives can supply suitable brake resistors.
Brake resistor assemblies must be rated to absorb both peak braking power during deceleration
and the average power over the complete cycle.
Peak braking power Ppk =
0.0055 × J × ( n12 − n 2 2 )
( W)
tb
Average braking power Pav =
Ppk
tc
x tb
J
n1
- total inertia (kgm2)
- initial speed (rpm)
n2
- final speed (rpm)
tb
tc
- braking time (s)
- cycle time (s)
Obtain information on the peak power rating and the average power rating of the resistors from
the resistor manufacturer. If this information is not available, a large safety margin must be
incorporated to ensure that the resistors are not overloaded.
By connecting these resistors in series and in parallel the braking capacity can be selected for
the application.
IMPORTANT: The minimum resistance of the combination and maximum dc link voltage must be as
specified in Chapter 8: “Technical Specifications” - Internal Dynamic Brake Switch.
690+ Series AC Drive
3-26
Installing the Drive
120
chassis mounted
100
free air
80
% of Rated Power 60
40
20
0
0
25
50
75
100
125
150
175
200
Ambient Temp (C)
Figure 3-19 Brake Resistor Derating Graph
External AC Supply EMC Filter
WARNING!
Do not use an internal ac supply EMC filter with supplies that are not balanced
with respect to earth (IT). They must only be used with
earth referenced supplies (TN).
External filters are available for use with TN and IT supplies. Please check for
suitability in Chapter 8: “Technical Specifications” - External AC Supply (RFI) Filters.
Do not touch filter terminals or cabling for at least 3 minutes
after removing the ac supply.
Only use the ac supply filter with a permanent earth connection.
IMPORTANT: Do not use an external filter on a drive supplied with an internal ac supply EMC filter.
Mount the filter as close as possible to the drive.
Note: Follow the cabling requirements given in Chapter 8: “Technical Specifications”
Refer to Chapter 8: “External AC Supply (RFI) Filters” for further information.
690+ Series AC Drive
Installing the Drive
3-27
Footprint/Bookcase Mounting Filters for Frame B, C, D, E & F
These filters can be both footprint and bookcase mounted. They are suitable for wall or cubicle
mount, but the filter must be fitted with the appropriate gland box when wall mounted.
The filters for Frames C, D and E look similar. The Frame D filter drawing is given in the
following pages. Size variations for the frames are given in the table below.
The Frame F drawing and sizes are also supplied.
Filter
Description
Filter Part Number
Terminal
Block
Earth
Terminal
Gland
Mounting
Dimensions
Fixing
Centres
Weight
460V TN
CO467841U020
10mm2
4mm
4 x 4mm
283 x 168x 45mm
272 x
143mm
1.7kg
500V IT/TN
CO467842U020
10mm2
4mm
4 x 4mm
283 x 168x 45mm
272 x
143mm
1.7kg
Frame B
Gland Plate : BA467840U020
Frame C
460V TN
CO467841U044
10mm2
5mm
4 x 4mm
400 x 178x 55mm
384 x
150mm
2.1kg
500V IT/TN
CO467842U044
10mm2
5mm
4 x 4mm
400 x 178x 55mm
384 x
150mm
2.1kg
Gland Plate : BA467840U044
Frame D
460V TN
CO467841U084
25mm2
6mm
4 x 4mm
513 x 233 x 70mm
495 x
208mm
4.2kg
500V IT/TN
CO467842U084
25mm2
6mm
4 x 4mm
513 x 233 x 70mm
495 x
208mm
4.2kg
Gland Plate : BA467840U084
Frame E
460V TN
CO467841U105
50mm2
8mm
4 x 4mm
698 x 250 x 80mm
680 x
216mm
6.2kg
500V IT/TN
CO467842U105
50mm2
8mm
4 x 4mm
698 x 250 x 80mm
680 x
216mm
6.2kg
Gland Plate : BA467840U105
Frame F
460V TN
CO467841U215
95mm2
8mm
not
applicable
825 x 250 x
115mm
795 x
216mm
500V IT/TN
CO467842U215
95mm2
8mm
not
applicable
825 x 250 x
115mm
795 x
216mm
Gland Plate : Not applicable
690+ Series AC Drive
3-28
Installing the Drive
Figure 3-20 Footprint/Bookcase Mounting Filters (generic drawing)
690+ Series AC Drive
Installing the Drive
Figure 3-21 Gland Box for Footprint/Bookcase Mounting Filters (generic drawing)
690+ Series AC Drive
3-29
3-30
Installing the Drive
EMC Motor Output Filter
This can help the drive achieve EMC and filter thermal conformance. It also ensures longer
motor life by reducing the high voltage slew rate and overvoltage stresses. Mount the filter as
close to the VSD as possible. Please refer to Parker SSD Drives for the selection of a suitable
filter.
Output Contactors
Output contactors can be used, although we recommend that this type of operation is limited to
emergency use only, or in a system where the drive can be inhibited before closing or opening
this contactor.
Earth Fault Monitoring Systems
We do not recommend the use of circuit breakers (e.g. RCD, ELCB, GFCI), but where their use
is mandatory, they should:
•
Operate correctly with dc and ac protective earth currents (i.e. type B RCDs as in
Amendment 2 of IEC755).
• Have adjustable trip amplitude and time characteristics to prevent nuisance tripping on
switch-on.
When the ac supply is switched on, a pulse of current flows to earth to charge the
internal/external ac supply EMC filter’s internal capacitors which are connected between phase
and earth. This has been minimised in Parker SSD Drives’ filters, but may still trip out any
circuit breaker in the earth system. In addition, high frequency and dc components of earth
leakage currents will flow under normal operating conditions. Under certain fault conditions
larger dc protective earth currents may flow. The protective function of some circuit breakers
cannot be guaranteed under such operating conditions.
WARNING!
Circuit breakers used with VSDs and other similar equipment are not suitable for
personnel protection. Use another means to provide personal safety. Refer to
EN50178 (1997) / VDE0160 (1994) / EN60204-1 (1994)
Line Chokes (input)
Line chokes may be used to reduce the harmonic content of the supply current where this a
particular requirement of the application or where greater protection from mains borne transients
is required. Line chokes are fitted internally to Frames E and F. Please refer to Parker SSD
Drives for the selection of a suitable line choke for Frames B, C and D.
AC Motor Choke (output)
Maximum Motor dv/dt = 10,000V/μs. This can be reduced by adding a motor choke in series
with the motor.
Installations with long cable runs may suffer from nuisance overcurrent trips, refer to Chapter 8:
“Technical Specifications” - Cabling Requirements for maximum cable lengths. A choke may
be fitted in the drive output to limit capacitive current. Screened cable has a higher capacitance
and may cause problems in shorter runs. Contact Parker SSD Drives for recommended choke
values.
5703/1 Speed Repeater Support
The 5703/1 unit provides the facility to run a line of drives in speed-lock. For accurate speed
holding, encoder feedback is required. Ratioed speed-locking is supported.
A 16-bit signal is passed between the drives using a fibre optic link connected to the P3 port on
each drive. The P3 port operates RS232 compatible signal levels. The 5703/1 unit converts these
signals into a fibre optic signal for transmission, and from the converted optical signal to RS232
for reception.
Refer to the manual supplied with the 5703/1 Speed Repeater.
Note:
The P3 port is configured for 5703/1 support using the MMI. Refer to the Software
Product Manual, Chapter 1: “Programming Your Application”
690+ Series AC Drive
Operating the Drive
4-1
OPERATING THE DRIVE
4
DEFAULT
By default, the drive will operate in Remote Start/Stop and Remote Speed Control. Analog and
digital inputs and outputs are selected to control the unit.
The drive will operate as an open-loop drive. No set-up or tuning is required. It is programmed
to control an induction motor of equivalent power, current and voltage rating to the drive.
In this chapter, refer to Control Philosophy, Initial Start-up Routine, (Routine 1: Remote
Control using Control Terminals) and The Start/Stop Mode Explained.
Pre-Operation Checks
WARNING!
Wait for 5 minutes after disconnecting power before working on any part of the
system or removing the terminal cover from the drive.
Initial checks before applying power:
• Mains power supply voltage is correct.
• Motor is of correct voltage rating and is connected in either star or delta, as appropriate.
• Check all external wiring circuits - power, control, motor and earth connections.
Note: Completely disconnect the drive before point to point checking with a buzzer, or when
checking insulation with a Meggar.
• Check for damage to equipment.
• Check for loose ends, clippings, drilling swarf etc. lodged in the drive and system.
• If possible check that the motor can be turned freely, and that any cooling fans are intact and
free from obstruction.
Ensure the safety of the complete system before the drive is energised:
• Ensure that rotation of the motor in either direction will not cause damage.
• Ensure that nobody else is working on another part of the system which will be affected by
powering up.
• Ensure that other equipment will not be adversely affected by powering up.
Prepare to energise the drive and system as follows:
• Remove the supply fuses, or isolate using the supply circuit breaker.
• Disconnect the load from the motor shaft, if possible.
• If any of the drive’s control terminals are not being used, check whether these unused
terminals need to be tied high or low. Refer to Chapter 8: Technical Specifications - Control
Terminals.
• Check external run contacts are open.
• Check external speed setpoints are all zero.
Re-apply power to the drive and system
The drive has Macro 1 installed as the factory default. If you are controlling the drive in Remote
control, refer to the Software Product Manual : “Application Macros” for details of other
macros.
690+ Series AC Drive
4-2
Operating the Drive
Control Philosophy
There are four ways to control the drive using Remote and Local control:
690+ inverter
using
690+ inverter
using
analog
and digital
inputs and
outputs
DEFAULT
PC running
ConfigEd Lite
or other suitable
software
690+ inverter
using
690+ inverter
using
Technology
Box
to fieldbus
and
Comms link
Operator
Station
REMOTE CONTROL
LOCAL CONTROL
Frame B illustrated
Figure 4-1 Remote and Local Control Modes
Start/Stop and Speed Control
There are two forms of control in operation at any time: Start/Stop and Speed Control. Each can
be individually selected to be under either Local or Remote Control.
•
•
Local or Remote Start/Stop decides how you will start and stop the drive.
Local or Remote Speed Control determines how you will control the motor speed.
In each case, Local and Remote control are offered by using the following:
Local: The Keypad
Remote: Analog and digital inputs and outputs, RS232 Port or the 6053 Technology Box
Thus the drive can operate in one of four combinations of local and remote modes:
LOCAL
SPEED CONTROL
REMOTE
SPEED CONTROL
SPEED SETPOINT
SPEED SETPOINT
DEFAULT
LOCAL START/STOP
REMOTE START/STOP
REMOTE
SPEED CONTROL
SPEED SETPOINT
LOCAL START/STOP
LOCAL
SPEED CONTROL
SPEED SETPOINT
REMOTE START/STOP
Frame B illustrated
Figure 4-2 The Four Combinations of Local and Remote Control
690+ Series AC Drive
Operating the Drive
4-3
Note: Start/Stop is also known as “Sequencing”.
Speed Control is also known as “Reference Generation”.
Selecting Local or Remote Control
If the default combination of remote Start/Stop and Speed Control is not suitable for your
application, follow the instructions below using the Keypad or a suitable PC programming tool
to select suitable combinations of local or remote control.
Note: You can only change between Local and Remote control when the drive is “stopped”.
To change a combination the Keypad must have FULL VIEW selected; allowing you to
view enough of the menu structure to make the change. Refer to Chapter 5: “The
Keypad” - Menu Viewing Levels.
The L/R key on the Keypad toggles between Local and Remote control, changing both
Start/Stop and Speed Control modes at the same time.
However, you can “fix” either or both modes in software to be either Local or Remote control.
This makes the L/R key inoperative for that mode. In this way, you can select a combination
where both Local and Remote modes are present.
To do this, go to the LOCAL CONTROL menu at level 4 and select
either:
LOCAL ONLY
Sets Local control
REMOTE ONLY
Sets Remote control
LOCAL/REMOTE
Gives selection powers back to the L/R key.
MMI Menu Map
1
SETUP
2
SEQ & REF
3
LOCAL CONTROL
Fixing only one of the modes will mean that the L/R key will still toggle the other mode
between Local and Remote control.
LED Indications
The mode of control is indicated by the
“LOCAL” LEDs on the Keypad:
SEQ = Start/Stop
REF = Speed Control
If the LED is illuminated ( O ), then LOCAL
mode is in force.
SEQ MODES
LOCAL ONLY
LOCAL
HEALTH
SEQ
Figure 4-3 Control Mode LED Indications
Note: The default is for the L/R key to be operative for both Sequencing and Reference
Generation, and to be set for Remote control, i.e. both LEDs will be off.
690+ Series AC Drive
REF
4-4
Operating the Drive
Initial Start-up Routines
WARNING!
Unpredictable motion, especially if motor parameters are incorrect.
Ensure no personnel are in the vicinity of the motor or any connected machinery.
Ensure that no machinery connected to the motor will be damaged by
unpredictable motion.
Ensure that the emergency stop circuits function correctly before running the
motor for the first time.
Replace the supply fuses or circuit breaker and apply power to the drive.
The routine below will run the drive in the default V/F fluxing control mode (VOLTS / HZ) to
begin with using either the Control Terminals, or the Keypad (if supplied).
Routine 1: Remote Control using Control Terminals
DEFAULT
This is the simplest method of operating the drive. No Set-up or tuning is required. The drive
can only operate in V/F Fluxing control mode (VOLTS / HZ).
This routine assumes that the drive’s control terminals are wired as shown in Figure 3-15
“Typical Connection to the Control Terminals”.
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the speed potentiometer is set to zero.
1.
Power-up the unit. The HEALTH LED will light (the RUN LED remains off).
If the HEALTH LED flashes, the drive has tripped. Refer to Chapter 6: “Trips and Fault
Finding” to investigate and remove the cause of the trip. Reset the unit by momentarily
closing either the RESET switch or the RUN switch. The HEALTH LED will now light.
2.
Close the RUN switch. The RUN LED will flash if the setpoint is at zero. Turn the speed
potentiometer up a little to apply a small speed setpoint. The RUN LED will light and the
motor will rotate slowly.
Reverse the motor’s direction of rotation either by pressing the DIR key, or by swapping two of
the motor phases (WARNING: Disconnect the mains supply first).
Reading the Status LEDs
The HEALTH and RUN LEDs indicate status.
The LEDs are considered to operate in five
different ways:
OFF
SHORT FLASH
EQUAL FLASH
LONG FLASH
ON
HEALTH
RUN
Figure 4-4 Blank Cover
showing LED Operation
690+ Series AC Drive
Operating the Drive
HEALTH
RUN
4-5
Drive State
Re-configuration, or corrupted non-volatile memory at power-up
Tripped
Auto Restarting, waiting for trip cause to clear
Auto Restarting, timing
Stopped
Running with zero reference, enable false or contactor feedback
false
Running
Stopping
Braking and running with zero speed demand
Braking and running
Braking and stopping
Table 4-1 Status indications given by the Blank Cover Health and Run LEDs
Routine 2: Local Control using the Keypad
Note: Refer to Chapter 5: “The Keypad” to familiarise yourself with the Keypad’s LED
indications, and how to use the keys and menu structure.
This routine assumes that the drive’s control terminals are wired as shown in Figure 3-15
“Typical Connection to the Control Terminals” and the Keypad is fitted.
1.
Power-up the unit. The display will show the power-up screen, “AC MOTOR DRIVE”.
After a few seconds, SETPOINT(REMOTE) will appear on the display.
The HEALTH, STOP, and FWD LEDs will light.
If the HEALTH LED flashes, the drive has tripped. The display will indicate the reason for
the trip. Refer to Chapter 6: “Trips and Fault Finding” to investigate and remove the cause
of the trip. Reset the trip condition by pressing the Stop/Reset key on the keypad. The
HEALTH LED will now light.
2.
Press the L/R (Local/Remote) key to enable Local control. Both the LOCAL SEQ and
LOCAL REF LEDs will light when Local control in enabled.
3.
Press the RUN key. The RUN LED will light and the motor will rotate slowly. (The RUN
LED would flash if the setpoint was at zero.)
4.
Reverse the motor’s direction of rotation by pressing either the DIR key, or by swapping
two of the motor phases (WARNING: Disconnect the mains supply first).
Using the Keypad (or other suitable programming tool) the drive must now be set-up:
• as a simple Open-loop Drive (V/F fluxing)
• in Sensorless Vector Fluxing mode
• in Closed-Loop Vector mode
690+ Series AC Drive
4-6
Operating the Drive
Set-up as an Open-loop Drive (V/F Fluxing)
The parameters from the QUICK SETUP menu most likely to require
attention in this control mode (VOLTS / HZ) are shown below.
Tag
QUICK SET-UP
Parameters
1105 CONTROL MODE
106 BASE FREQUENCY
Default
VOLTS / HZ
* 50.0 Hz
1032 MAX SPEED
* 1500 RPM
337
258
259
104
50
MIN SPEED
RAMP ACCEL TIME
RAMP DECEL TIME
V/F SHAPE
QUADRATIC TORQUE
-100.00 %
10.0 s
10.0 s
LINEAR LAW
FALSE
64
365
MOTOR CURRENT
CURRENT LIMIT
** 11.3 A
100.00%
107
FIXED BOOST
** 0.00 %
279
246
13
22
712
719
231
742
1083
RUN STOP MODE
JOG SETPOINT
ANALOG INPUT 1
ANALOG INPUT 2
ANALOG INPUT 3
ANALOG INPUT 4
DISABLED TRIPS
DISABLED TRIPS +
MOTOR BASE FREQ
RAMPED
10.0 %
0..+10 V
0..+10 V
0..+10 V
0..+10 V
0000 >>
0040 >>
** 50.0 Hz
1084
65
83
84
MOTOR VOLTAGE
MAG CURRENT
NAMEPLATE RPM
MOTOR POLES
** 400.0 V
** 3.39 A
** 1445 RPM
** 4
MMI Menu Map
1
QUICK SETUP
Brief Description
Selects the control mode for the drive
Frequency at which maximum output volts is
generated
Max speed clamp and scale factor for other
speed parameters
Min speed clamp
Acceleration time from 0Hz to max speed
Deceleration time from max speed to 0Hz
Constant torque V to F characteristic
Selects between Constant or Quadratic mode of
operation
Calibrates drive to motor full load current
Level of motor current as % of FULL LOAD
CALIB
Boosts starting torque by adding volts at low
speed
Ramp to standstill when RUN signal removed
Drive speed setpoint whilst jogging
Input range and type
Input range and type
Input range and type
Input range and type
Sub-menu to set disabled trips
Sub-menu to set disabled trips
Frequency at which drive gives maximum output
volts
Maximum motor output voltage
Calibrates drive to motor no load current
Motor nameplate speed
Number of motor poles
Set-up using the Sensorless Vector Fluxing Mode
The drive must be tuned to the motor in use by matching the motor
parameters in the drive to those of the motor being controlled.
MMI Menu Map
1
QUICK SETUP
IMPORTANT: You MUST use the Autotune feature.
Enter values for the following parameters in the QUICK SETUP menu.
Tag
QUICK SET-UP
Parameters
1105 CONTROL MODE
1032 MAX SPEED
Default
Brief Description
SENSORLESS VEC Selects the control mode for the drive
* 1500 RPM
Max speed clamp and scale factor for other
speed parameters
64
MOTOR CURRENT
** 11.3 A
Calibrates drive to motor full load current
365 CURRENT LIMIT
100.00%
Level of motor current as % of FULL LOAD
CALIB
1083 MOTOR BASE FREQ
** 50.0 Hz
Frequency at which drive gives maximum
output volts
1084 MOTOR VOLTAGE
** 400.0 V
Maximum motor output voltage
83
NAMEPLATE RPM
** 1445 RPM
Motor nameplate speed (motor
synchronous speed (rpm) minus full load
slip)
84
MOTOR POLES
** 4
Number of motor poles
124 MOTOR CONNECTION
** STAR
Type of motor connection
603 AUTOTUNE ENABLE
FALSE
Enables the Autotune feature
For more information refer to Chapter 5: “The Keypad” - The QUICK SETUP Menu.
690+ Series AC Drive
Operating the Drive
4-7
Set-up using the Closed-loop Vector Mode
WARNING!
When the drive is run for the first time the direction of rotation will be unknown,
the drive may run inconsistently, and the speed control may not operate.
In this mode, speed feedback signals from the motor shaft encoder are
processed to determine the rotational speed of the shaft. A PI
algorithm within the software uses this information to produce varying
gate drive signals to the drive circuits. These signals cause the drive to
output the required voltage and frequency for a particular motor speed.
If the encoder is to be fitted to the System Board option rather than the
Speed Feedback option, set SPD LOOP SPD FBK to SLAVE
ENCODER.
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP
2 SYSTEM BOARD
3 PHASE CONFIGURE
SPD LOOP SPD FBK
IMPORTANT: You MUST use the Autotune feature.
MMI Menu Map
Enter values for the following parameters in the QUICK SETUP
menu.
Tag
QUICK SET-UP
Parameters
1105 CONTROL MODE
1032 MAX SPEED
64
365
566
MOTOR CURRENT
CURRENT LIMIT
ENCODER LINES
Brief Description
CLOSED-LOOP VEC
* 1500 RPM
Selects the control mode for the drive
Max speed clamp and scale factor for other
speed parameters
Calibrates drive to motor full load current
Level of motor current as % of FULL LOAD
CALIB
Set to the number of lines used by the
encoder
Frequency at which drive gives maximum
output volts
Maximum motor output voltage
Motor nameplate speed
(motor synchronous speed (rpm) minus full
load slip)
Number of motor poles
Type of motor connection
** 11.3 A
100.00%
** 2048
** 50.0 Hz
1084 MOTOR VOLTAGE
83
NAMEPLATE RPM
** 400.0 V
** 1445 RPM
567
603
MOTOR POLES
MOTOR
CONNECTION
ENCODER INVERT
AUTOTUNE ENABLE
QUICK SETUP
Default
1083 MOTOR BASE FREQ
84
124
1
** 4
** STAR
FALSE
FALSE
Encoder direction
Enables the Autotune feature
For more information refer to Chapter 5: “The Keypad” - The QUICK SETUP Menu.
The Autotune Feature
IMPORTANT: You MUST carry out an Autotune if you intend to use the drive in either of the two vector
control modes. If you are using it in Volts/Hz control an Autotune is not necessary.
The Autotune feature identifies motor characteristics to allow the drive to control the motor.
It loads the values into the parameters below, which are in the QUICK SETUP menu.
690+ Series AC Drive
Parameter
ENCODER INVERT
Description
Encoder direction
MAG CURRENT
Magnetising current
STATOR RES
Per phase stator resistance
Note
Parameter is only set up if drive
is configured to run as Closedloop Vector
Not measured by Stationary
Autotune
Not measured by Stationary
Autotune
4-8
Operating the Drive
Parameter
LEAKAGE INDUC
Description
Per phase stator leakage
inductance
Per phase mutual
inductance
Rotor time constant
MUTUAL INDUC
ROTOR TIME CONST
Note
This is identified from
magnetising current and motor
nameplate rpm
For further information on the functions of all parameters, refer to the Product Manual, Chapter
1: “Programming your Application”.
Stationary or Rotating Autotune?
Will the motor spin freely, i.e. not connected to a load, during the Autotune?
•
•
If it can spin freely, use a Rotating Autotune (preferred)
If it cannot spin freely, use a Stationary Autotune
Rotating Autotune
Preferred method
Stationary Autotune
Only used when the
motor cannot spin
freely during the
Autotune feature
Action
Requirements
Spins the motor up to
the maximum speed
set by the user to
identify all necessary
motor characteristics
Motor must spin freely during Autotune
Motor does not spin
during Autotune. A
limited set of motor
characteristics are
identified
You must enter the correct value of
magnetising current
Do not subsequently operate the drive above
base speed
In Closed-loop Vector Mode set up the
encoder direction parameter
Necessary Data
You MUST enter values for the following parameters, found in the
QUICK SETUP menu, before an Autotune can be carried out:
MOTOR CURRENT
MOTOR BASE FREQ
MOTOR VOLTAGE
NAMEPLATE RPM
MOTOR POLES
ENCODER LINES
MMI Menu Map
1
QUICK SETUP
(maximum motor output voltage)
(motor nameplate speed)
(the number of motor poles)
(if an encoder is fitted, enter the number of lines used by the encoder)
Performing a Rotating Autotune
Check that the motor can rotate freely in the forward direction. Ensure also that the motor is
unloaded. Ideally, the motor shaft should be disconnected completely. This includes
disconnection from a gearbox, where fitted.
1.
In the QUICK SETUP menu, set MAX SPEED to the maximum
MMI Menu Map
speed at which you will operate the drive in normal operation. The 1 QUICK SETUP
Autotune will characterise the motor up to 30% above this speed.
If you later wish to run faster than this, you will need to carry out another Autotune.
2.
Set AUTOTUNE ENABLE to TRUE, and start the drive. The drive will carry out a
Rotating Autotune, indicated by the Run and Stop led’s flashing. This may take several
minutes, during which the motor will be accelerated to maximum speed and then brought
to a stop. When complete, the drive is returned to the stopped condition and the
AUTOTUNE ENABLE parameter is reset to FALSE. In Closed-loop Vector mode (with an
encoder) the encoder sign has been adjusted by the Autotune feature.
IMPORTANT: Now perform a SAVE CONFIG to save your new settings. Refer to Chapter 5: “The
Keypad” - SAVE CONFIG.
690+ Series AC Drive
Operating the Drive
4-9
Performing a Stationary Autotune
Before starting the stationary Autotune, you MUST enter the value of magnetising current for
the motor. This may be available on the motor nameplate. If not, you may need to contact the
motor supplier.
1.
2.
In the AUTOTUNE menu, set the MODE parameter to
STATIONARY.
Set ENABLE to TRUE, and start the drive. The drive will carry
out a stationary Autotune, injecting current into the motor but
not turning the shaft. The Run and Stop led’s will flash. When
complete, the drive is returned to the stopped condition and the
AUTOTUNE ENABLE parameter is reset to FALSE.
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP
2 MOTOR CONTROL
3 AUTOTUNE
ENABLE
MODE
IMPORTANT: Now perform a SAVE CONFIG to save your new settings. Refer to Chapter 5: “The
Keypad” - SAVE CONFIG.
•
If the drive is configured to run in Sensorless Vector mode, set-up is complete.
•
If the drive is configured to run in Closed-loop Vector mode, i.e. using an encoder, then the
encoder direction must be set up. Refer to “Setting the Encoder Sign” below.
Setting the Encoder Sign
If you have performed a Stationary Autotune in Closed-loop Vector mode, you should check the
encoder directon as follows:
Look and listen to the motion of the motor when the drive is running at a speed demand of
between 5 - 10%.
As a test, use the Up (V) control key to increase the speed to about double the original figure.
Change the direction of rotation using the FWD/REV control key.
If ENCODER INVERT is correct, the motor will rotate smoothly and will respond to the
changes in speed demand and direction.
If ENCODER INVERT is incorrect, the motor will rotate in a jerky and/or noisy manner.
Alternatively, it may rotate smoothly at a very low speed but not respond to changes in speed
demand or direction.
• Change the setting of ENCODER INVERT to change the encoder sign.
• Change the direction of rotation back to the original direction. Re-set the speed demand.
The encoder sign is now correct for the original motor direction.
If however the direction of the motor is incorrect at this point, then power down the entire drive,
wait for 3 minutes (for the dc link capacitors to discharge) and then swap the motor drive cables
M1/U and M2/V. Change the setting of ENCODER INVERT.
The encoder sign is now correct for the new motor direction.
690+ Series AC Drive
4-10
Operating the Drive
The Start/Stop Mode Explained
The default configuration below shows the drive in Remote control, (using the analog and
digital inputs and outputs). This example will be referred to in the following explanations.
SETPOINT
Analog Input 1
Terminal 2
SPEED SETPOINT
+
-
ACCEL TIME
Reference Selection
SETPOINT TRIM
Analog Input 2
Terminal 3
SETPOINT(REMOTE)
MAX SPEED CLAMP
Reference
Ramp
Clamps
+
+
JOG SETPOINT
SPEED DEMAND
0%
LOCAL SETPOINT
+
DECEL TIME
MIN SPEED CLAMP
SPEED TRIM
FORWARD/REVERSE
Key on Operator Station
0%
RUN FWD
Digital Input 1
Terminal 12
If REMOTE SETPOINT is not 0,
then SPEED TRIM is added
Sequencing Logic
RUN REV
Digital Input 2
Terminal 13
RAMP OUTPUT
Analog Output 1
Terminal 6
HEALTH
Digital Output 1
Terminal 21, 22
NOT STOP
Digital Input 3
Terminal 14
RUNNING
Digital Output 2
Terminal 23, 24
REMOTE
REVERSE
Digital Input 4
Terminal 15
JOG
Digital Input 5
Terminal 16
DEFAULT
REM TRIP
RESET
Digital Input 7
Terminal 18
Figure 4-5 Portion of the Default Configuration
Start/Stop Controlled Remotely
DEFAULT
In the configuration shown, the reference value is obtained by summing ANALOG INPUT 1
and ANALOG INPUT 2. The direction of rotation is controlled by DIGITAL INPUT 4. When
the RUN input (DIGITAL INPUT 1) is TRUE, the SPEED DEMAND ramps up to the reference
value at a rate controlled by ACCEL TIME. The drive will continue to run at the reference value
while the RUN input remains TRUE.
Similarly when the JOG input (DIGITAL INPUT 5) is TRUE, the SPEED DEMAND ramps up
to the JOG SETPOINT at a ramp rate set by JOG ACCEL TIME (not shown in the diagram).
The drive will continue to run at the JOG SETPOINT while the JOG input remains TRUE.
690+ Series AC Drive
Operating the Drive
4-11
Start/Stop Controlled Locally
The reference value is set by the SETPOINT (LOCAL) parameter. The direction of rotation is
controlled by the DIR key (forward/reverse) on the Keypad. When the RUN key is pressed the
SPEED DEMAND ramps up to the reference value at a rate controlled by ACCEL TIME. The
drive will continue to run at the reference value even when the RUN key is released. Press the
STOP key to “stop” the drive.
When the JOG key is pressed and held, the SPEED DEMAND ramps up to the JOG SETPOINT
at a ramp rate set by JOG ACCEL TIME (not shown in the diagram). Release the JOG key to
“stop” the drive.
Interaction between RUN and JOG
Only one of these signals can be in effect at any one time; the other signal is ignored. The drive
must be “stopped” to change from running to jogging, or vice versa.
Start/Stop Mode Diagnostics
In the configuration shown, Start/Stop mode provides two DIGITAL OUTPUT signals
(RUNNING and HEALTH).
The RUNNING signal is TRUE from the time a start command is processed until a stop
sequence is completed. This normally means the time between the drive starting until the power
stack is quenched. Refer to the Software Product Manual, Chapter : “Sequencing Logic States”
for a more detailed description.
The HEALTH output is TRUE when the drive is not tripped.
Additional diagnostic parameters are available when using the Keypad. These are described in
the Software Product Manual, Chapter 4: “Programming Your Application” and “Sequencing
Logic States”.
Starting and Stopping Methods
MMI Menu Map
MMI Menu Map
MMI Menu Map
MMI Menu Map
1
SETUP
1
SETUP
1
SETUP
1
SETUP
2
SEQ & REF
2
SEQ & REF
2
SEQ & REF
2
SEQ & REF
3
REFERENCE
3
SEQUENCING LOGIC
3
REFERENCE STOP
3
REFERENCE RAMP
SPEED TRIM
NOT STOP
STOP TIME
REMOTE REVERSE
NOT FAST STOP
STOP DELAY
SPEED DEMAND
NOT COAST STOP
FAST STOP TIME
DECEL TIME
HOLD
Note: Refer to the Software Product Manual, Chapter 1: “Programming Your Application” REFERENCE, SEQUENCING LOGIC, REFERENCE STOP and REFERENCE RAMP, for
explanations of parameters.
Normal Stopping Methods
DEFAULT
Macro 1 is set to “Ramp to Stop” (at STOP TIME, set to 10.0s).
• To “stop” the locally controlled drive press the STOP key on the Keypad
• To “stop” the remotely controlled drive remove the 24V from the RUN FWD input, terminal
12
With the Keypad, or suitable programming tool, the drive can be selected to “Ramp to Stop”, or
to “Coast to Stop” at one of two rates (STOP TIME or FAST STOP TIME).
690+ Series AC Drive
4-12
Operating the Drive
Ramp to Stop
When a stop command is received, the drive decelerates from its actual speed towards zero for
the programmed DECEL TIME time. When this time has elapsed, SPEED TRIM is ramped to
0% in the programmed STOP TIME time.
Note: If SPEED TRIM does not operate, SPEED DEMAND is reduced to 0% in DECEL TIME.
The power stack remains energised until the STOP DELAY period has elapsed.
RUN input
SPEED DEMAND
REMOTE SETPOINT
POWER
CIRCUIT
DISABLED
SPEED TRIM
Speed 0%
Ramp to zero speed at
DECEL TIME
STOP DELAY
Ramp SPEED TRIM to
zero at STOP TIME
Figure 4-6 Ramp to Stop with a Remote Reference
A special case exists when the DECEL TIME is set to 0.0 seconds, or when the HOLD
parameter is TRUE. In both these situations the SPEED DEMAND will ramp down to zero at
the STOP TIME.
RUN input
REMOTE SETPOINT
SPEED DEMAND
SPEED TRIM
POWER
CIRCUIT
DISABLED
Speed 0%
Ramp SPEED DEMAND
to zero at STOP TIME
STOP DELAY
Figure 4-7 Remote to Stop with a Remote Reference: no DECEL TIME
Coast to Stop
In this mode the DECEL TIME ramp and the STOP TIME ramp are both ignored. Thus the
SPEED DEMAND changes immediately to 0% as soon as the Stop command is given. The
power stack is also immediately disabled at this time, causing the load to coast.
POWER CIRCUIT DISABLED
RUN input
REMOTE SETPOINT
SPEED DEMAND
Speed 0%
Figure 4-8 Coast to Stop with a Remote Reference
690+ Series AC Drive
Operating the Drive
4-13
Advanced Stopping Methods
The drive can be selected to NOT FAST STOP or to NOT COAST STOP. The stopping
procedure is unaffected by Local or Remote Sequencing options.
Forced Fast Stop
The Not Fast Stop mode overrides the RUN FWD, RUN REV and JOG inputs in Remote mode,
and the RUN and JOG Keypad keys in Local mode. It is selected by setting NOT FAST STOP
to TRUE.
The Fast Stop mode can be set to either RAMP or COAST. The stopping sequence starts when
the NOT FAST STOP input goes FALSE, regardless of the state of the RUN input.
NOT FAST STOP
SPEED DEMAND
REMOTE SETPOINT
POWER
CIRCUIT
DISABLED
SPEED TRIM
Speed 0%
Ramp SPEED DEMAND to
zero at FAST STOP TIME
FAST STOP LIMIT
Figure 4-9 Forced Fast Stop RAMP Mode example
Forced Coast Stop
Using the Not Coast Stop mode immediately disables the power stack, causing the load to coast
to a stop. The drive gives priority to the NOT COAST STOP signal. The NOT FAST STOP
signal is therefore ignored while NOT COAST STOP is active.
NOT COAST STOP
POWER CIRCUIT DISABLED
REMOTE SETPOINT
SPEED DEMAND
SPEED TRIM
Speed 0%
Figure 4-10 Forced Coast Stop example
The Trip Condition
When a trip condition is detected, a similar stopping method to NOT COAST STOP is used.
The power stack cannot be re-enabled until the trip condition has been cleared and successfully
reset.
Refer to Chapter 6: “Trips and Fault Finding” for further details.
690+ Series AC Drive
4-14
Operating the Drive
Logic Stopping
The drive can be stopped by setting the NOT STOP to FALSE for a short time, (>100 ms). The
stop sequence continues even if the NOT STOP signal goes inactive before the drive is stopped.
Various combinations of stop logic are shown below.
RUN FWD ignored as
already running
RUN FWD acted on
immediately as previous
state was RUN FWD
RUN FWD not ignored
as now stopping
RUN FWD
RUN REV
NOTSTOP
REMOTE SETPOINT
Speed 0%
SPEED DEMAND
REMOTE SETPOINT
Figure 4-11 Interaction between RUN FWD, RUN REV and NOT STOP Parameters
JOG not ignored as now
stopping. Waits for stop to
complete before acting on
JOG.
JOG ignored as
already running
JOG immediately effective
as previous mode was JOG
JOG
RUN FWD
NOT STOP
REMOTE SETPOINT
JOG SETPOINT
Speed 0%
SPEED DEMAND
Figure 4-12 Example of the Interaction between RUN and JOG Parameters
Starting Methods
24V
Sequencing Logic
RUN FWD
Digital Input 1
RUN FWD
RUN REV
Digital Input 2
NOT STOP
Digital Input 3
RUN REV
NOT STOP
JOG
Digital Input 5
JOG
TRUE
CONTACTOR CLOSED
TRUE
DRIVE ENABLE
TRUE
NOT FAST STOP
TRUE
NOT COAST STOP
REMOTE REVERSE
Digital Input 4
REMOTE REVERSE
REM TRIP RESET
Digital Input 7
REM TRIP RESET
TRUE
FALSE
TRIP RST BY RUN
POWER UP START
Figure 4-13 Default Sequencing Wiring (Macro 1)
690+ Series AC Drive
Operating the Drive
4-15
The methods below can be used when the drive has Macro 1, 2, 3 or 4 installed.
DEFAULT
The default configuration view above caters for Single, Two, and Three Wire Logic Starting
without rewiring. Note that the NOT STOP parameter is active (FALSE - not wired to),
meaning that the drive will only run while the relevant RUN parameters are held TRUE.
Starting Several Drives Simultaneously
IMPORTANT: We do not recommend that the DRIVE ENABLE signal is used to start an drive in
“normal” use.
Use the DRIVE ENABLE parameter to control the output power stack. When this parameter is
FALSE, the power stack is disabled regardless of the state of any other parameters. In
conjunction with the HEALTH output parameter, DRIVE ENABLE can synchronise several
drives on power-up.
Single Wire Logic Starting
Use just DIGITAL INPUT 1 when the motor direction will always be the same. All other digital
inputs are FALSE (0V). The motor will run while the RUN FWD switch is closed, and will stop
when it is open.
Two Wire Logic Starting
This uses two inputs; RUN FWD and RUN REV. The drive can operate in forward and reverse
depending upon which switch is closed. If both RUN FWD and RUN REV are TRUE (24V) at
the same time, both are ignored and the drive will stop.
Three Wire Logic Starting
24V
Sequencing Logic
RUN FWD
Digital Input 1
RUN REV
Digital Input 2
NOT STOP
Digital Input 3
RUN FWD
RUN REV
NOT STOP
Figure 4-14 Wiring for Three Wire Logic Starting
This example uses three inputs; RUN FWD, RUN REV and NOT STOP.
• Fit normally-open push button switches to RUN FWD and RUN REV.
• Fit a normally-closed push button switch to NOT STOP, thus NOT STOP is held TRUE
(24V). When TRUE, the action of NOT STOP is to latch the RUN FWD and RUN REV
signals. When FALSE, these signals are not latched.
For example, operating the RUN FWD switch starts the drive running forward. Operating the
RUN REV switch causes the drive to run in reverse. Operating the NOT STOP switch (making
“NOT STOP” FALSE) at any time causes the drive to stop running.
Note: The JOG parameter is never latched in this way. The drive only jogs while the JOG
parameter is TRUE.
690+ Series AC Drive
4-16
Operating the Drive
690+ Series AC Drive
The Keypad
5-1
THE KEYPAD
5
Connecting the Keypad
The Keypad is a plug-in MMI
(Man-Machine Interface) option
that allows full use of the drive’s
features.
It provides for local control of
the drive, monitoring, and
complete access for application
programming.
Insert the Keypad into the front
of the drive (replacing the blank
cover and plugging into the
RS232 programming port); or
mount it up to 3 metres away
using the optional panel
mounting kit with connecting
lead: refer to Chapter 3:
“Installing the Drive” - Fitting
the Remote 6901 Keypad.
DC
I GM
I TO
ATLOD
EE
A
RCDD
RRI VI V
1
DC 4Q 15A
0.75kW
230V 4.x
OK
SEQ
REF
E
PROG
M
L
R
Programming
Keys
Local
Control
Keys
JOG
Two Keypads (or one and a PC
running suitable programming
Figure 5-1 Keypad displaying Welcome screen
software) can be used
simultaneously. In this case each Keypad runs independently.
The drive can operate in one of two modes:
Remote Control Mode: Allowing access for application programming using digital and analog
inputs and outputs
Local Control Mode:
Providing local control and monitoring of the drive using the Keypad,
or PC running suitable programming software
Local control keys are inactive when Remote control mode is
selected and vice versa, with one exception; the L/R key toggles
Local or Remote control modes and so is always operative.
HINT: Customise the action of the Keypad to create an effective
working tool.
The Power-Up Condition
On power-up, a default Welcome screen is displayed for several
seconds showing the product description; power rating, voltage
and software version of the drive. After a few seconds the display
changes to the SETPOINT (REMOTE) parameter.
Note: By default the drive always initialises in Remote control mode,
with the Local control keys inactive, making it unlikely that the
motor could be started accidentally.
WELCOME SCREEN
timeout
from
welcome
screen
SETPOINT (REMOTE)
0.0 %
PROG
WELCOME SCREEN
M
OPERATOR
menu at level 1
Remote Mode (default)
690+ Series AC Drive
5-2
The Keypad
Controlling the Drive using the Keypad
Control Key Definitions
Note: Refer to Chapter 4: “Operating the Drive” for more detail about Remote and Local
modes.
Keys for Programming the Drive
Note: See “Navigating the Menu System”, page 5-4 for a quick-start to using the menu.
UP
Navigation - Moves upwards through the list of parameters.
Parameter - Increments the value of the displayed parameter.
Command Acknowledge - Confirms action when in a command menu.
DOWN
Navigation - Moves downwards through the list of parameters.
Parameter - Decrements the value of the displayed parameter.
ESCAPE
E
MENU
M
PROG
Navigation - Displays the previous level’s Menu.
Parameter - Returns to the parameter list.
Trip Acknowledge - Acknowledges displayed Trip or Error message.
Navigation - Displays the next Menu level, or the first parameter of the
current Menu.
Parameter - Allows a writable parameter to be modified (this is indicated
by → appearing on the left of the bottom line).
Navigation - Toggles between current locations within the Operator
menu and any other menu.
PROG
LOCAL/
REMOTE
L
R
Control - Toggles between Remote and Local Control for both Start/Stop
(Seq) and Speed Control (Ref). When toggling, the display automatically
goes to the relevant SETPOINT screen, and the SETPOINT (LOCAL)
screen will have the V and W keys enabled to alter the setpoint.
Keys for Operating the Drive Locally
FORWARD/
REVERSE
JOG
JOG
RUN
Control - Changes the direction of motor rotation. Only operates
when the drive is in Local Speed Control mode.
Control - Runs the motor at a speed determined by the JOG
SETPOINT parameter. When the key is released, the drive returns to
“stopped”. Only operates when the drive is “stopped“ and in Local
Start/Stop mode.
Control - Runs the motor at a speed determined by the LOCAL
SETPOINT or REMOTE SETPOINT parameter.
Trip Reset - Resets any trips and then runs the motor as above. Only
operates when the drive is in Local Start/Stop (Seq) mode.
STOP/RESET
Control - Stops the motor. Only operates when the drive is in Local
Sequence mode.
Trip Reset - Resets any trips and clears displayed message if trip is
no longer active.
690+ Series AC Drive
The Keypad
5-3
LED Indications
There are seven LEDs that indicate the status of the drive. Each LED is considered to operate in
three different ways:
OFF
The LEDs are labelled HEALTH, LOCAL (as SEQ
and REF), FWD, REV, RUN, and STOP.
Combinations of these LEDs have the following
meanings:
FLASH
ON
HEALTH
RUN
STOP
Drive State
Re-Configuration
Tripped
Stopped
Stopping
Running with zero speed demand or enable false or
contactor feedback false
Running
Autotuning
Auto Restarting, waiting for trip cause to clear
Auto Restarting, timing
FWD
REV
Forward / Reverse State
Requested direction and actual direction are forward
Requested direction and actual direction are reverse
Requested direction is forward but actual direction is reverse
Requested direction is reverse but actual direction is forward
LOCAL
SEQ
LOCAL
REF
Local / Remote Mode
Start/Stop (Seq) and Speed Control (Ref) are controlled from the
terminals
Start/Stop (Seq) is controlled using the RUN, STOP, JOG and
FWD/REV keys. Speed Control (Ref) is controlled from the terminals
Start/Stop (Seq) is controlled from the terminals
Speed Control (Ref) is controlled using the up (V) and down (W)
keys
Start/Stop (Seq) and Speed Control (Ref) are controlled using the
Keypad keys
690+ Series AC Drive
5-4
The Keypad
The Menu System
The menu system is divided into a `tree’ structure with 5
menu levels. Menu Level 1 is at the top of the tree.
The Menu System
WELCOME SCREEN
The Keypad has selectable “viewing levels” which can
restrict the view of the menu system.
M
Below is a simple description of the menus at Menu
Level 1:
OPERATOR
menu at level 1
• OPERATOR: a customised view of selected
parameters contained in the SETUP menu. You can
create a working list of parameters for operating your
drive.
DIAGNOSTICS
menu at level 1
• DIAGNOSTICS: a view of important diagnostic
parameters contained in the SETUP menu.
QUICK SETUP
menu at level 1
• QUICK SETUP: contains all the parameters
necessary for the drive to turn the motor.
SETUP
menu at level 1
• SETUP: contains all the function block parameters
for programming your application.
SYSTEM
menu at level 1
• SYSTEM: Macro selection.
Figure 5-2 The Menu System
showing Menus at Level 1
Navigating the Menu System
On power-up, the Keypad defaults into the OPERATOR menu, timing out from the Welcome
screen. You can skip the timeout by pressing the M key immediately after power-up which will
take you directly to the OPERATOR menu.
The menu system can be thought of as map
which is navigated using the four keys shown
opposite.
exit to
Keys E and M navigate through the menu levels. previous
menu
The up (V) and down (W) keys scroll through
the Menu and Parameter lists.
Refer to “The Menu System Map” to see how
the full menu is mapped.
scroll
M
E
next menu
scroll
NAVIGATING THE MENU
HINT: Remember that because the Menu and Parameter lists are looped, the V key can
quickly move you to the last Menu or Parameter in the loop.
Menu Viewing Levels
For ease of operation there are three `viewing levels’ for the Keypad.
The setting for the VIEW LEVEL parameter decides how much of
the menu system will be displayed. The choice of menu for each has
been designed around a type of user, hence we have the Operator,
Basic and Advanced viewing levels.
In the QUICK SETUP menu, press the
parameter in the menu.
MMI Menu Map
1 QUICK SETUP
VIEW LEVEL
key to quickly move to VIEW LEVEL, the last
Note: The contents of the OPERATOR menu remains unchanged for all view levels.
Refer to “The Menu System Map”, page 5-6 to see how VIEW LEVEL changes the menu.
690+ Series AC Drive
The Keypad
5-5
Changing a Parameter Value
Refer to “The Menu System Map to see how the
full menu is mapped.
Each menu contains parameters.
increment
exit
enter
With the Parameter you want on view, press M to
parameter E
M parameter
begin editing.
change
change
The up (V) and down (W) keys will now change
the parameter/function value.
decrement
Press E to finish editing.
EDITING PARAMETERS
The four keys will once again navigate around the
Menus. Refer back to “Navigating the Menu System”, page 5-4.
Note: When viewing a “number” value, i.e. 100.00%, pressing the M key moves the cursor
along the number for editing of that character by the up (V) and down (W) keys.
“Alphanumeric” values, i.e. PUMP 2, are produced and edited in a similar way.
What do the Symbols mean next to some Parameters?
Parameter Status Information


=
 =
on the left of the bottom line to indicate
Pressing M in a parameter displays
that the up and down keys will now change parameter values. Pressing E removes
the symbol and reverts the up and down keys to scrolling through the parameters.
A writable parameter may be non-writable if it is the destination of a link. In this
case it will be indicated by  appearing on the left of the bottom line.
A Feedback Link is indicated by  appearing on the right of the bottom line.
Refer to the Software Product Manual, Chapter 1: “Programming Your
Application”.
Non-writable parameters are identified by = appearing on the left of the bottom
line. Note that some parameters become non-writable when the drive is running.
Expanded Menu Information >>
The parameters listed below are followed by >> to the right of the bottom display line indicating
that there is more information. Press the M key to display a further list of parameters.
AUTO RESTART menu at level 4: AR TRIGGERS 1, AR TRIGGERS+ 1, AR TRIGGERS 2
AR TRIGGERS+ 2
TRIPS STATUS menu at level 4:
DISABLED TRIPS, DISABLED TRIPS+,
ACTIVE TRIPS, ACTIVE TRIPS+,
TRIP WARNINGS, TRIP WARNINGS+
OP STATION menu at level 4:
ENABLED KEYS
Alert Message Displays
A message will be displayed on the Keypad when either:
•
A requested operation is not allowed:
The top line details the illegal operation, while the bottom
line gives the reason or cause. See example opposite.
•
The drive has tripped:
The top line indicates a trip has occurred while the bottom
line gives the reason for the trip. See example opposite.
1
* KEY
INACTIVE *
1
REMOTE SEQ
* *1* TRIPPED * * *
1
HEATSINK TEMP
Most messages are displayed for only a short period, or for as long as an illegal operation is
tried, however, trip messages must be acknowledged by pressing the E key.
Experience will show how to avoid most messages. They are displayed in clear, concise
language for easy interpretation. Refer to Chapter 6: “Trips and Fault Finding” for trip messages
and reasons.
690+ Series AC Drive
5-6
The Keypad
The Menu System Map
MENU LEVEL 1
MENU LEVEL 2
MENU LEVEL 3
MENU LEVEL 4
OPERATOR
menu at level 1
DIAGNOSTICS
menu at level 1
QUICK SETUP
menu at level 1
SETUP
menu at level 1
COMMUNICATIONS
5703 INPUT
5703 OUTPUT
SYSTEM
menu at level 1
SYSTEM PORT (P3)
TEC OPTION
SYSTEM BOARD
PHASE CONFIGURE
PHASE CONTROL
PHASE INCH
PHASE MOVE
PHASE OFFSET
PHASE PID
PHASE TUNING
HOIST/LIFT
BRAKE CONTROL
INPUTS & OUTPUTS
ANALOG INPUT
ANALOG INPUT 1
ANALOG OUTPUT
ANALOG OUTPUT 1
ANALOG INPUT 4
ANALOG OUTPUT 3
DIGITAL INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT 1
DIGITAL INPUT 15
M
E
DIGITAL OUTPUT
DIGITAL OUTPUT 1
DIGITAL OUTPUT 15
SYSTEM OPTION
LINKS
LINK
LINK 1
LINK 80
Effect of VIEW LEVEL
MENUS
OPERATOR / BASIC
ACCESS CONTROL
DISPLAY SCALE
BASIC
DISPLAY
LINKSCALE 1
DISPLAY SCALE 4
SELECTING ADVANCED WILL
DISPLAY ALL MENUS
OP STATION
OP STATION 1
OP STATION 2
OPERATOR MENU
OPERATOR MENU 1
OPERATOR MENU 16
MISCELLANEOUS
DEMULTIPLEXER
DEMULTIPLEXER 1
DEMULTIPLEXER 2
HOME
LOGIC FUNC
LOGIC FUNC 1
LOGIC FUNC 20
MULTIPLEXER
MULTIPLEXER 1
POSITION
MULTIPLEXER 2
VALUE FUNC
VALUE FUNC 1
VALUE FUNC 20
Note: When VIEW LEVEL is set to OPERATOR, the PROG key also toggles to the VIEW LEVEL parameter in the
QUICK SETUP menu. This can be password protected.
690+ Series AC Drive
The Keypad
MENU LEVEL 1
MENU LEVEL 2
MOTOR CONTROL
MENU LEVEL 3
MENU LEVEL 4
AUTOTUNE
CURRENT LIMIT
DYNAMIC BRAKING
FEEDBACKS
FLUXING
FLYCATCHING
INJ BRAKING
INVERSE TIME
MOTOR DATA
PATTERN GEN
POWER LOSS CNTRL
SETPOINT SCALE
SLEW RATE LIMIT
SLIP COMP
SPEED LOOP
STABILISATION
TORQUE LIMIT
VOLTAGE CONTROL
SEQ & REF
AUTO RESTART
COMMS CONTROL
LOCAL CONTROL
REFERENCE
REFERENCE JOG
REFERENCE RAMP
REFERENCE STOP
M
E
SEQUENCING LOGIC
SETPOINT FUNCS
FILTER
FILTER 1
LINEAR RAMP
FILTER 2
MINIMUM SPEED
PID
Effect of VIEW LEVEL
PID (TYPE 2)
OPERATOR / BASIC
BASIC
SELECTING ADVANCED WILL
DISPLAY ALL MENUS
PRESET
PRESET 1
RAISE/LOWER
PRESET 8
SKIP FREQUENCIES
S-RAMP
ZERO SPEED
TRIPS
I/O TRIPS
STALL TRIP
TRIPS HISTORY
TRIPS STATUS
SPD FBK TRIP
OVER SPEED TRIP
WINDER
COMPENSATION
DIAMETER CALC
SPEED CALC
TAPER CALC
TORQUE CALC
690+ Series AC Drive
5-7
5-8
The Keypad
The PROG Key
The PROG key toggles between the OPERATOR menu and any other menu, remembering and
returning to previous positions in each menu. As you press the PROG key, the title of the menu
you are about to enter is displayed, i.e. OPERATOR or for example DIAGNOSTICS. Releasing
the key clears the display and releases you into that menu.
The Menu System
WELCOME SCREEN
E
timeout
from
power-up
SETPOINT (REMOTE)
=
0.0%
M
press immediately after
power-up to skip the
timeout
PROG
to other menus/parameters
to other OPERATOR menu parameters
Figure 5-3 The Menu System showing Operation of the E, M and PROG Keys
Holding the PROG key for approximately three seconds takes you to the SAVE CONFIG menu.
Refer to “Quick Save Feature”, page 5-18.
The L/R Key
The L/R key (LOCAL/REMOTE) toggles between Remote and Local Control. In doing so, the
view of the SETPOINT parameter in the OPERATOR menu toggles between SETPOINT
(LOCAL) and SETPOINT (REMOTE. The default is for the SETPOINT (REMOTE) parameter
to be displayed.
Note: A different naming convention is applied in the OPERATOR menu for these parameters
when displayed as the first parameter entry:
• REMOTE SETPOINT is displayed as SETPOINT (REMOTE)
• LOCAL SETPOINT is displayed as SETPOINT (LOCAL)
• COMMS SETPOINT is displayed as SETPOINT (COMMS)
• JOG SETPOINT is displayed as SETPOINT (JOG)
Pressing the L/R key when in Remote mode takes you directly to the SETPOINT (LOCAL)
parameter with the Edit mode enabled. Press the PROG key to return to the previous display.
690+ Series AC Drive
The Keypad
5-9
The OPERATOR Menu
You can create 16 “custom screens” for display in the OPERATOR
menu at level 1.
Each screen contains:
MMI Menu Map
1
OPERATOR
• a top line of sixteen characters
• user-definable units
• user-selectable scaling factor
• user selectable limits
• user selectable coefficients
This feature may be used to re-display the setpoint, for example, in more convenient units.
To add an item to the Operator Menu select a parameter (as shown below) in an OPERATOR
MENU function block. You can also give the parameter a new name, and set the scaling and
units to be displayed.
Note: If PARAMETER is set to NULL, the Operator Menu item is not included in the Operator
Menu.
Parameter Selection
OPERATOR MENU
menu at level 4
1
for example
M
Select one of the
parameters to edit
M
PARAMETER SELECTION
PARAMETER
NULL
Select/change a function block
M
To select a different
instance of this
function block, i.e.
ANALOG INPUT 2
M
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
Select/change a parameter
E
OPERATOR MENU
menu at level 4
1
Figure 5-4 Parameter Selection
690+ Series AC Drive
5-10
The Keypad
String Entry
Customising the Parameter Name
To enter a string:
• Press the M key to begin entering a character.
• Use the (V) and down (W) keys to scroll through the character set for each of the character
spaces. If a key is not pressed within 2 seconds, the cursor will progressively move to the left
of the screen.
• Press the M key to move to the next character within 2 seconds.
• Press the E key to exit parameter editing.
OPERATOR MENU
NAME
1
M
NAME
To input another character
(2 second timout)
M
STRING ENTRY
Scroll through
the characters
(2 second timout)
NAME
a
E
NAME
another name
for example
E
OPERATOR MENU
NAME
1
Figure 5-5 String Entry
Note: For details about user-definable units, scaling factors, limits and coefficients refer to the
Software Product Manual, Chapter 1: Programming Your Application - OPERATOR MENU
and DISPLAY SCALE function blocks.
690+ Series AC Drive
The Keypad
5-11
The DIAGNOSTICS Menu
Diagnostics are used to monitor the status of the drive, internal
variables, and its inputs and outputs.
MMI Menu Map
1
DIAGNOSTICS
The table below describes the parameters contained in the
DIAGNOSTICS menu at level 1.
Ranges are given as “—.xx %”, for example, indicating an indeterminate integer for the value.
(Note the reference in brackets to the function block where each parameter is stored. Refer to
the Software Product Manual).
The DIAGNOSTICS Menu
SPEED DEMAND
Tag No. 255
Range: —.xx %
Indicates actual speed demand. This is the input to the frequency controller.
(Refer to the REFERENCE function block)
REMOTE SETPOINT
Tag No. 245
Range: —.xx %
This is the target reference that the drive will ramp to in remote reference mode (not including
trim), direction is taken from REMOTE REVERSE and the sign of REMOTE SETPOINT.
(Refer to the REFERENCE function block)
COMMS SETPOINT
Tag No. 770
Range: —.xx %
This setpoint is the target reference that the drive will ramp to in Remote Reference Comms
mode (not including trim). The direction is always positive, i.e. forward.
(Refer to the REFERENCE function block)
LOCAL SETPOINT
Tag No. 247
Range: —.xx %
Indicates the Keypad setpoint. It is always a positive quantity; saved on power down. Direction
is taken from LOCAL REVERSE.
(Refer to the REFERENCE function block)
JOG SETPOINT
Tag No. 246
Range: —.xx %
The setpoint is the target reference that the drive will ramp to.
(Refer to the REFERENCE function block)
TOTAL SPD DMD RPM
Tag No. 1203
Range: —.xx rpm
The final value of speed demand obtained after summing all sources.
(Refer to the SPEED LOOP function block)
TOTAL SPD DMD %
Tag No. 1206
Range: —.xx %
The final value of speed demand obtained after summing all sources.
(Refer to the SPEED LOOP function block)
SPEED FBK RPM
Tag No. 569
Range: —.xx rpm
The mechanical speed of the motor shaft in revolutions per minute.
(Refer to the FEEDBACKS function block)
SPEED FBK %
Tag No. 749
Range: —.xx %
Shows the mechanical speed of the motor shaft as a percentage of the maximum speed setting.
(Refer to the FEEDBACKS function block)
SPEED ERROR
Tag No. 1207
Range: —.xx %
The difference between the demanded speed and the actual speed.
(Refer to the SPEED LOOP function block)
DRIVE FREQUENCY
Tag No. 591
Range: —.xx Hz
Shows the drive output frequency in Hz.
(Refer to the PATTERN GEN function block)
690+ Series AC Drive
5-12
The Keypad
The DIAGNOSTICS Menu
DIRECT INPUT
Tag No. 1205
Range: —.xx %
The value of the direct input, after scaling and clamping.
(Refer to the SPEED LOOP function block)
TORQ DMD ISOLATE
Tag No. 1202
Range: FALSE / TRUE
Speed Control mode and Torque Control mode selection. Torque Control mode = TRUE.
(Refer to the SPEED LOOP function block)
ACTUAL POS LIM
Tag No. 1212
Range: —.xx %
The final actual positive torque limit.
(Refer to the TORQUE LIMIT function block)
ACTUAL NEG LIM
Tag No. 1213
Range: —.xx %
The final actual negative torque limit.
(Refer to the TORQUE LIMIT function block)
AUX TORQUE DMD
Tag No. 1193
Range: —.xx %
The auxiliary motor torque as a percentage of rated motor torque.
(Refer to the SPEED LOOP function block)
TORQUE DEMAND
Tag No. 1204
Range: —.xx %
The demanded motor torque as a percentage of rated motor torque.
(Refer to the SPEED LOOP function block)
TORQUE FEEDBACK
Tag No. 70
Range: —.xx %
The estimated motor torque, as a percentage of rated motor torque.
(Refer to the FEEDBACKS function block)
FIELD FEEDBACK
Tag No. 73
Range: —.xx %
A value of 100% indicates the motor is operating at rated magnetic flux (field).
(Refer to the FEEDBACKS function block)
MOTOR CURRENT %
Tag No. 66
Range: —.xx %
This diagnostic contains the level of rms line current being drawn from the drive and is seen as
a % of the MOTOR CURRENT parameter setting in the MOTOR DATA function block.
(Refer to the FEEDBACKS function block)
MOTOR CURRENT A
Tag No. 67
Range: —.x A
This diagnostic contains the level of rms line current being drawn from the drive.
(Refer to the FEEDBACKS function block)
DC LINK VOLTS
Tag No. 75
Range: —. V
The internal dc voltage tested by the FEEDBACKS block.
(Refer to the FEEDBACKS function block)
TERMINAL VOLTS
Tag No. 1020
Range: —. V
This shows the rms voltage, between phases, applied by the drive to the motor terminals.
(Refer to the FEEDBACKS function block)
BRAKING
Tag No. 81
Range: FALSE / TRUE
A read-only parameter indicating the state of the brake switch.
(Refer to the DYNAMIC BRAKING function block)
DRIVE FREQUENCY
Tag No. 591
Range: —.x Hz
The drive output frequency.
(Refer to the PATTERN GEN function block)
690+ Series AC Drive
The Keypad
5-13
The DIAGNOSTICS Menu
ACTIVE TRIPS
Tag No. 4
Range: 0000 to FFFF
Indicates which trips are currently active. These parameters are a coded representation of the
trip status.
(Refer to the TRIPS STATUS function block)
ACTIVE TRIPS +
Tag No. 740
Range: 0000 to FFFF
Indicates which trips are currently active. These parameters are a coded representation of the
trip status.
(Refer to the TRIPS STATUS function block)
FIRST TRIP
Tag No. 6
Range: Enumerated - refer to block
From when a trip occurs until that trip is reset, this parameter indicates the trip source. When
several trips have occurred, this parameter indicates the first one that was detected.
(Refer to the TRIPS STATUS function block)
ANALOG INPUT 1
Tag No. 16
Range: —.xx %
(VALUE) The input reading with scaling and offset applied.
(Refer to the ANALOG INPUT function block)
ANALOG INPUT 2
Tag No. 25
Range: —.xx %
(VALUE) The input reading with scaling and offset applied.
(Refer to the ANALOG INPUT function block)
ANALOG INPUT 3
Tag No. 715
Range: —.xx %
(VALUE) The input reading with scaling and offset applied.
(Refer to the ANALOG INPUT function block)
ANALOG INPUT 4
Tag No. 722
Range: —.xx %
(VALUE) The input reading with scaling and offset applied.
(Refer to the ANALOG INPUT function block)
DIGITAL INPUT 1
Tag No. 31
Range: FALSE / TRUE
(VALUE) The TRUE or FALSE input, (after any inversion).
(Refer to the DIGITAL INPUT function block)
DIGITAL INPUT 2
Tag No. 34
Range: FALSE / TRUE
(VALUE) The TRUE or FALSE input, (after any inversion).
(Refer to the DIGITAL INPUT function block)
DIGITAL INPUT 3
Tag No. 37
Range: FALSE / TRUE
(VALUE) The TRUE or FALSE input, (after any inversion).
(Refer to the DIGITAL INPUT function block)
DIGITAL INPUT 4
Tag No. 40
Range: FALSE / TRUE
(VALUE) The TRUE or FALSE input, (after any inversion).
(Refer to the DIGITAL INPUT function block)
DIGITAL INPUT 5
Tag No. 43
Range: FALSE / TRUE
(VALUE) The TRUE or FALSE input, (after any inversion).
(Refer to the DIGITAL INPUT function block)
DIGITAL INPUT 6
Tag No. 726
Range: FALSE / TRUE
(VALUE) The TRUE or FALSE input, (after any inversion).
(Refer to the DIGITAL INPUT function block)
690+ Series AC Drive
5-14
The Keypad
The DIAGNOSTICS Menu
DIGITAL INPUT 7
Tag No. 728
Range: FALSE / TRUE
(VALUE) The TRUE or FALSE input, (after any inversion).
(Refer to the DIGITAL INPUT function block)
EXTERNAL TRIP
Tag No. 234
Range: FALSE / TRUE
(EXTERNAL) A general purpose signal designed to be internally wired to a digital input block.
When this signal goes TRUE this causes an EXTERNAL TRIP to occur, (unless this trip is
disabled within the TRIPS area). This parameter is not saved in the drive’s non-volatile
memory and thus is reset to the default setting at power-up.
(Refer to the I/O TRIPS function block)
ANALOG OUTPUT 1
Tag No. 45
Range: —.xx %
(VALUE) The demanded value to output.
(Refer to the ANALOG OUTPUT function block)
ANALOG OUTPUT 2
Tag No. 731
Range: —.xx %
(VALUE) The demanded value to output.
(Refer to the ANALOG OUTPUT function block)
ANALOG OUTPUT 3
Tag No. 800
Range: —.xx %
(VALUE) The demanded value to output.
(Refer to the ANALOG OUTPUT function block)
DIGITAL OUTPUT 1
Tag No. 52
Range: FALSE / TRUE
(VALUE) The TRUE or FALSE output demand.
(Refer to the DIGITAL OUTPUT function block)
DIGITAL OUTPUT 2
Tag No. 55
Range: FALSE / TRUE
(VALUE) The TRUE or FALSE output demand.
(Refer to the DIGITAL OUTPUT function block)
DIGITAL OUTPUT 3
Tag No. 737
Range: FALSE / TRUE
(VALUE) The TRUE or FALSE output demand.
(Refer to the DIGITAL OUTPUT function block)
690+ Series AC Drive
The Keypad
5-15
The QUICK SETUP Menu
By loading a different macro, you are installing the default settings for
that macro’s application. Once a macro has been loaded (or the default
Macro 1 is used), the parameters most likely to require attention are
contained in the QUICK SETUP menu at level 1.
MMI Menu Map
1
QUICK SETUP
The Default values in the table below are correct for when the UK country code is selected and
a 400V 5.5kW Frame C power board is fitted. Some parameters in the table are marked:
* Value dependent upon the Language field of the Product Code, e.g. UK
** Value dependent upon the overall “power-build”, e.g. 400V, 5.5kW
The values may be different for your drive/application.
Tag
QUICK SET-UP
Parameters
1105 CONTROL MODE
1032 MAX SPEED
Default
VOLTS / HZ
* 1500 RPM
337
258
259
279
246
106
MIN SPEED
RAMP ACCEL TIME
RAMP DECEL TIME
RUN STOP MODE
JOG SETPOINT
VHZ BASE FREQ
104
50
V/F SHAPE
QUADRATIC TORQUE
64
107
MOTOR CURRENT
FIXED BOOST
** 11.3 A
** 6.00 %
365
CURRENT LIMIT
100.00%
1159 MOTOR BASE FREQ
1160
83
84
124
761
566
567
603
65
119
120
121
MOTOR VOLTAGE
NAMEPLATE RPM
MOTOR POLES
MOTOR
CONNECTION
ENCODER SUPPLY
ENCODER LINES
ENCODER INVERT
AUTOTUNE ENABLE
MAG CURRENT
STATOR RES
LEAKAGE INDUC
MUTUAL INDUC
1163 ROTOR TIME CONST
1187
1188
13
22
712
719
231
742
876
SPEED PROP GAIN
SPEED INT TIME
AIN 1 TYPE
AIN 2 TYPE
AIN 3 TYPE
AIN 4 TYPE
DISABLE TRIPS
DISABLE TRIPS +
VIEW LEVEL
-100.00 %
10.0 s
10.0 s
RAMPED
10.0 %
** 50.0 Hz
LINEAR LAW
FALSE
** 50.0 Hz
** 400.0 V
** 1445 RPM
** 4
** STAR
10.0V
** 2048
FALSE
FALSE
** 3.39 A
** 1.3625 Ω
** 43.37 mH
** 173.48 mH
** 276.04 ms
20.00
100 ms
0..+10 V
0..+10 V
0..+10 V
0..+10 V
0000 >>
0040 >>
TRUE
Table 5-1 Parameters for setting-up the drive
690+ Series AC Drive
Brief Description
Selects the control mode for the drive
Max speed clamp and scale factor for other
speed parameters
Min speed clamp
Acceleration time from 0Hz to max speed
Deceleration time from max speed to 0Hz
Ramp to standstill when RUN signal removed
Drive speed setpoint whilst jogging
Determines the frequency at which maximum
output volts is generated
Constant torque V to F characteristic
Selects between Constant or Quadratic mode
of operation
Calibrates drive to motor full load current
Boosts starting torque by adding volts at low
speed
Level of motor current as % of FULL LOAD
CALIB
Frequency at which drive gives maximum
output volts
Maximum motor output voltage
Motor nameplate speed
Number of motor poles
Type of motor connection
Set to supply voltage required by the encoder
Set to the number of lines used by the encoder
Encoder direction
Enables the Autotune feature
Calibrates drive to motor no load current
Motor per-phase stator resistance
Motor per-phase stator leakage inductance
Motor per-phase stator mutual (magnetising)
inductance
The motor model rotor time constant as
determined by Autotune
Sets the proportional gain of the loop
The integral time constant of the speed loop
Input range and type
Input range and type
Input range and type
Input range and type
Sub-menu to set disabled trips
Sub-menu to set disabled trips
Selects full menu for MMI display
5-16
The Keypad
The SYSTEM Menu
Saving/Restoring/Deleting Your Application
Caution
On power-up, the drive will always run APPLICATION.
HINT: The default APPLICATION supplied with the drive is a copy of Macro 1. Saving your
current configuration to APPLICATION will ensure that it is always ready to run on power-up.
SAVE CONFIG
The SAVE CONFIG menu saves your current settings to the
displayed config name.
You can save to any config name listed. Saving to an existing config
name, rather than a newly created config name, will overwrite the
previous information.
MMI Menu Map
1
SYSTEM
2
SAVE CONFIG
SAVE CONFIG
By default, the only name in this list will be APPLICATION. As you create new config names,
they will be added to this list. If you also save the new config into APPLICATION, it will
always be restored on power-up.
Note: Because factory macros are read-only, they do not appear in the SAVE CONFIG menu.
To save an application see below.
SAVE CONFIG
APPLICATION
SAVE CONFIG
PUMP 1
SAVE CONFIG
`UP` TO CONFIRM
M
SAVE CONFIG
menu at level 2
E
RESTORE CONFIG
MMI Menu Map
This menu restores the displayed application/macro to the drive.
To restore an application/macro see below.
RESTORE CONFIG
APPLICATION
1
SYSTEM
2
RESTORE CONFIG
RESTORE CONFIG
RESTORE CONFIG
MACRO 1
M
RESTORE CONFIG
`UP` TO CONFIRM
RESTORE CONFIG
menu at level 2
690+ Series AC Drive
The Keypad
5-17
NEW CONFIG NAME
Use the NEW CONFIG NAME parameter to create a new config
name.
The Keypad provides a default name, APPLICATION, for you to save
your application in. You can save more than one application using
different names, e.g. PUMP 1, PUMP 2.
MMI Menu Map
1
SYSTEM
2
NEW CONFIG NAME
NEW CONFIG NAME
To enter a config name see below. Refer to “Figure 5-5 String Entry”, page 5-10 for details of
how to enter a string.
NEW CONFIG NAME
APPLICATION
NEW CONFIG NAME
PUMP 1
NEW CONFIG NAME
`UP` TO CONFIRM
NEW CONFIG NAME
menu at level 2
string entry
E
E E
DELETE CONFIG
You can delete your own applications in this menu.
Note: If you delete APPLICATION, don’t worry. Software always
provides a new APPLICATION on power-up which will be the
same as MACRO 1.
You cannot delete the factory macros.
To delete an application see below.
DELETE CONFIG
PUMP 1
DELETE CONFIG
PUMP 2
M
DELETE CONFIG
`UP` TO CONFIRM
DELETE CONFIG
menu at level 2
690+ Series AC Drive
E
MMI Menu Map
1
SYSTEM
2
DELETE CONFIG
DELETE CONFIG
5-18
The Keypad
Selecting the Language
This option selects a different display language.
LANGUAGE
LANGUAGE
MMI Menu Map
1 SYSTEM
ENGLISH
2 LANGUAGE
M
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
LANGUAGE
language
other
E
other
The available languages are: ENGLISH, GERMAN, FRENCH, SPANISH, ITALIAN,
SWEDISH, POLISH, PORTUGUESE.
Special Menu Features
Quick Save Feature
From anywhere in the menu system, hold down the PROG key for approximately 3 seconds to
move quickly to the SAVE CONFIG menu. You can save your application and return
conveniently to your original display.
DIAGNOSTICS
menu at level 1
for example
PROG
SAVE CONFIG
menu at level 2
SAVE CONFIG
APPLICATION
SAVE CONFIG
"UP" TO CONFIRM
M
for example
M
SAVE CONFIG
menu at level 2
PROG
SETPOINT (REMOTE)
0.0 %
=
DISPLAYS OPERATOR MENU
(NORMAL ACTION OF PROG KEY)
for example
PROG
DIAGNOSTICS
menu at level 1
HOLD
PRESS AGAIN TO RETURN TO
PREVIOUS MENU/PARAMETER
690+ Series AC Drive
The Keypad
5-19
Quick Tag Information
With a parameter displayed, hold down the M key for approximately 3 seconds to display the
parameter’s tag number (a message may be displayed during this time).
RAMP TIME
100.00%
M
RAMP TIME
TAG
HOLD FOR 3 SECONDS
326
E
RAMP TIME
100.00%
Quick Link Information
When in Advanced view level and with the Quick Tag Information on display, press the M key
in any configurable parameter to display link information about that parameter.
The drive is in Parameterisation Mode and links cannot be edited.
Note: Quick Link Information is not available for parameters that are non-configurable.
DIGITAL OUTPUT 3
menu at level 4
M
VALUE
VALUE
TAG
FALSE
M
52
M
PRESS AGAIN FOR
QUICK LINK INFORMATION
E
See Note
SOURCE
NULL
VALUE
TAG
HOLD FOR 3 SECONDS FOR
QUICK TAG INFORMATION
52
E
VALUE
FALSE
E
DIGITAL OUTPUT 3
menu at level 4
Note: The drive must be in Configuration mode before links can be edited. Pressing the M key
at this point will display the ENABLE CONFIG page. Refer to the Software Product
Manual, Chapter 1: “Programming Your Application” - Making and Breaking Links in
Configuration Mode.
690+ Series AC Drive
5-20
The Keypad
Password Protection
When activated, the password prevents unauthorised parameter
modification by making all parameters “read-only”. If you attempt to
modify a password protected parameter, you will be prompted for the
password.
The password protection is activated/deactivated using the
PASSWORD parameter.
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP
2 MENUS
3 ACCESS CONTROL
PASSWORD
To Activate Password Protection
By default the password feature is deactivated, i.e. 0000.
1. Enter a new password in the PASSWORD parameter (anything other than the default value
of 0000), for example 0002.
2. Press the E key repeatedly until the Welcome screen is displayed. Pressing the E key again
activates password protection.
PASSWORD
XXXX
M
PASSWORD
0000
PASSWORD
0002
E repeatedly
WELCOME SCREEN
E
PASSWORD
LOCKED
Note: Perform a SAVE CONFIG if you need the password to be saved on power-down.
To De-activate Password Protection
If you try to change the value of a parameter with password protection activated, the
PASSWORD screen is displayed for you to enter the current password. If you enter the
password correctly password protection is temporarily de-activated.
To Re-activate Password Protection
Re-activate an existing password by pressing the E key repeatedly until the PASSWORD
LOCKED screen is displayed.
Note: You can choose to have the password protect individual parameters in the OPERATOR
menu. Under default conditions these are not protected. Refer to the Software Product
Manual, Chapter 1: “Programming Your Application” - OPERATOR MENU::IGNORE
PASSWORD and ACCESS CONTROL::NO SETPOINT PWRD.
To Remove Password Protection (default status)
Navigate to the PASSWORD parameter and enter the current password. Press the E key. Reset
the password to 0000. Password protection is now removed.
You can check that password protection has been removed by repeatedly pressing the E key
until the Welcome screen is displayed. Pressing the E key again will NOT display the
PASSWORD LOCKED screen.
Note: Perform a SAVE CONFIG if you need “no password” to be saved on power-down.
690+ Series AC Drive
The Keypad
5-21
Power-up Key Combinations
Resetting to Factory Defaults (2-button reset)
A special key combination restores to the drive the current product code default values and
Macro 1 parameter values. This feature is only available at power-up as a security measure.
Hold down the keys opposite:
Power-up the drive, continue
to hold for at least 2 seconds
HOLD
RESTORE DEFAULTS
"UP" TO CONFIRM
M
E
UPDATES
IGNORES
Changing the Product Code (3-button reset)
On rare occasions it may be necessary to change the default settings by changing the Product
Code. The Product Code is referred to in Chapter 2.
A special key combination is required to change the product code. This feature is only available
at power-up as a security measure.
The 3-button reset will take you to the POWER BOARD menu in the expanded SYSTEM menu
(highlighted in the diagram below).
SYSTEM
HOLD
POWER BOARD
LANGUAGE
Hold down the keys opposite:
Power-up the drive, continue
to hold for at least 2 seconds
DEFAULT TO 60HZ
*
RESTART
*
EXIT TO BOOT
*
SAVE CONFIG
RESTORE CONFIG
POWER BOARD
5.5kW 400V
E
for example
E
M
POWER BOARD
menu at level 2
see
diagram
below
Select from the
expanded SYSTEM menu
DELETE CONFIG
IMPORTANT: We recommend the menus marked *above are only used by Parker SSD Drives or
suitably qualified personnel.
Refer to The SYSTEM Menu, page 5-16 for all non-highlighted menus.
690+ Series AC Drive
PROG
5-22
The Keypad
POWER BOARD
HOLD
E
Hold down the keys opposite:
Power-up the drive, continue
to hold for at least 2 seconds
Config mode is selected,
indicated by all LEDs flashing
PROG
POWER DATA
CORRUPT
E
POWER BOARD
????kW
M
POWER BOARD
????kW
POWER BOARD
5.5kW 400V
E
LANGUAGE
DEFAULTS LOADED
E
Config mode is de-selected
LEDs cease flashing
The power data is stored
WELCOME SCREEN
The diagram above shows a 3-button reset when there is no power data stored in the drive. If the
drive has power data stored, then the “Power Data Corrupt” and “Language Defaults Loaded”
alert messages will not be displayed, also the display will show the current power board
selection, instead of “????kW ???V”.
DEFAULT TO 60HZ
The setting of this parameter selects the drive operating frequency. It affects those parameters
whose values are dependent upon the default base frequency of the drive. Settings will only be
updated following a “restore macro” operation.
Refer to the Software Product Manual, Chapter 2: “Parameter Specification” - Frequency
Dependent Defaults.
RESTORE DEFAULTS
Refer to “Resetting to Factory Defaults (2-button reset)”, page 5-21.
Quick Enter Configuration Mode
You can initialise the drive in Configuration Mode by holding the STOP key during power-up.
Hold down the key opposite:
Power-up the drive, continue
to hold for at least 2 seconds
HOLD
AC MOTOR DRIVE
5.5kW 400V V1.1
for example
M
Menu System
690+ Series AC Drive
Trips and Fault Finding
6-1
TRIPS AND FAULT FINDING
6
Trips
What Happens when a Trip Occurs
When a trip occurs, the drive’s power stage is immediately disabled causing the motor and load
to coast to a stop. The trip is latched until action is taken to reset it. This ensures that trips due to
transient conditions are captured and the drive is disabled, even when the original cause of the
trip is no longer present
Drive Indications
If a trip condition is detected the unit displays and performs the following actions.
1.
DEFAULT
1.
The HEALTH LED flashes indicating a Trip condition has occurred. (Investigate, find and
remove the cause of the trip.)
The programming block SEQ & REF::SEQUENCING LOGIC::TRIPPED signal is set to
TRUE.
The DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 (HEALTH) digital output changes between TRUE/FALSE,
depending on the output logic.
Keypad Indications (when connected)
If a trip condition is detected the MMI displays and performs the following actions.
1.
The HEALTH LED on the Keypad flashes indicating a Trip condition has occurred and a
trip message is displayed stating the cause of the trip.
2.
The programming block SEQ & REF::SEQUENCING LOGIC::TRIPPED signal is set to
TRUE.
The DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 (HEALTH) digital output changes between TRUE/FALSE,
depending on the output logic.
3.
The trip message(s) must be acknowledged by pressing the STOP key. The trip message
may be cleared by pressing the E key. Refer to Chapter 5: “The Keypad” - Alert Message
Displays.
Resetting a Trip Condition
All trips must be reset before the drive can be re-enabled. A trip can only be reset once the trip
condition is no longer active, i.e. a trip due to a heatsink over-temperature will not reset until the
temperature is below the trip level.
Note: More than one trip can be active at any time. For example, it is possible for both the
HEATSINK and the OVERVOLTAGE trips to be active. Alternatively it is possible for the
drive to trip due to an OVERCURRENT error and then for the HEATSINK trip to become
active after the drive has stopped (this may occur due to the thermal time constant of the
heatsink).
DEFAULT
Reset the trip(s) using the remote trip reset input, or by pressing the STOP key on the Keypad.
Success is indicated by the HEALTH LED (on the unit or MMI) ceasing to flash and returning
to a healthy “ON” state. The programming block SEQ & REF::SEQUENCING
LOGIC::TRIPPED output is reset to FALSE.
690+ Series AC Drive
6-2
Trips and Fault Finding
Using the Keypad to Manage Trips
Trip Messages
If the drive trips, then the display immediately shows a message indicating the reason for the
trip. The possible trip messages are given in the table below.
Trip Message and Meaning
Possible Reason for Trip
OVERVOLTAGE
The drive internal dc link voltage is too
high
The supply voltage is too high
Trying to decelerate a large inertia load too quickly
The brake resistor is open circuit
UNDERVOLTAGE
The drive internal dc link voltage is too
low
The supply voltage is too low
The supply has been lost
A supply phase is missing
OVERCURRENT
The motor current being drawn from the
drive is too high
Trying to accelerate a large inertia load too quickly
Trying to decelerate a large inertia load too quickly
Application of shock load to motor
Short circuit between motor phases
Short circuit between motor phase and earth
Motor output cables too long or too many parallel
motors connected to the drive
Fixed or auto boost levels are set too high
HEATSINK
The drive heatsink temperature is too
high
The ambient air temperature is too high
Poor ventilation or spacing between drives
EXTERNAL TRIP
User trip caused via control terminals
+24V not present on external trip (e.g. terminal 19,
Macro 1).
INPUT 1 BREAK
A signal break has been detected on
analog input 1 (terminal 1)
Analog input is incorrectly configured for 4-20mA
operation
Break in external control wiring
INPUT 2 BREAK
A signal break has been detected on
analog input 2 (terminal 2)
Analog input is incorrectly configured for 4-20mA
operation
Break in external control wiring
MOTOR STALLED
The motor has stalled (not rotating)
Motor loading too great
Current limit level is set too low
Stall trip duration is set too low
Fixed or auto boost levels are set too high
INVERSE TIME
The inverse time current limit is active:
•
motor loading is too great:
motor current >150% for 60s in Constant duty
motor current >110% for 60s in Quadratic duty
•
fixed or autoboost levels are too high
BRAKE RESISTOR
External dynamic braking resistor has
been overloaded
Trying to decelerate a large inertia load too quickly
or too often
BRAKE SWITCH
Internal dynamic braking switch has
been overloaded
Trying to decelerate a large inertia load too quickly
or too often
690+ Series AC Drive
Trips and Fault Finding
Trip Message and Meaning
6-3
Possible Reason for Trip
OP STATION
Keypad has been disconnected from
drive whilst drive is running in local
control
Keypad accidentally disconnected from drive
LOST COMMS
COMMS TIMEOUT parameter set too short
(refer to COMMS CONTROL menu at level 3)
CONTACTOR FBK
The CONTACTOR CLOSED input in the
SEQUENCING LOGIC function block remained
FALSE after a run command was issued
SPEED FEEDBACK
SPEED ERROR > 50.00% for 10 seconds
AMBIENT TEMP
The ambient temperature in the drive is too high
MOTOR OVERTEMP
The motor temperature is too high
Excessive load
Motor voltage rating incorrect
FIXED BOOST and/or AUTO BOOST set too high
Prolonged operation of the motor at low speed
without forced cooling
Check setting of INVERT THERMIST parameter in I/O
TRIPS menu at level 3.
Break in motor thermistor connection
CURRENT LIMIT
If the current exceeds 180% of stack
rated current for a period of 1 second,
the drive will trip. This is caused by
shock loads
Remove the cause of the shock load
24V FAILURE
The 24V customer output has fallen
below 17V
24V customer output is short circuited
TRIP 19
Reserved
Excessive loading
LOW SPEED OVER I
The motor is drawing too much current
(>100%) at zero output frequency
FIXED BOOST and/or AUTO BOOST set too high
(refer to FLUXING menu at level 4)
PHASE FAIL
One or more phases of the 3-phase supply is
missing. Check supply connections. Check fuses.
ENCODER 1 FAULT
The Error input on the Encoder TB is in the Error state
DESAT (OVER I)
Instantaneous overcurrent. Refer to OVERCURRENT
in this table
VDC RIPPLE
The dc link ripple voltage is too high. Check for a
missing input phase.
BRAKE SHORT CCT
Brake resistor overcurrent
690+ Series AC Drive
Check resistance brake resistor value is greater than
minimum allowed
OVERSPEED
Speed feedback has exceeded the THRESHOLD for a
period greater than DELAY.
ANALOG INPUT ERR
Analog input incorrectly configured.
Break in external control wiring.
TRIP 29
Reserved
6-4
Trips and Fault Finding
Trip Message and Meaning
Possible Reason for Trip
TRIP 30
Reserved
UNKNOWN
An unknown trip - refer to Parker SSD Drives
OTHER
One or more of the trips listed below have tripped.
MAX SPEED LOW
During Autotune the motor is required to run at the
nameplate speed of the motor. If MAX SPEED RPM
limits the speed to less than this value, an error will
be reported. Increase the value of MAX SPEED RPM
up to the nameplate rpm of the motor (as a
minimum). It may be reduced, if required, after the
Autotune is complete.
MAINS VOLTS LOW
The mains input voltage is not sufficient to carry out
the Autotune. Re-try when the mains has recovered.
NOT AT SPEED
The motor was unable to reach the required speed to
carry out the Autotune. Possible reasons include:
•
motor shaft not free to turn
•
the motor data is incorrect
MAG CURRENT FAIL
It was not possible to find a suitable value of
magnetising current to achieve the required
operating condition for the motor. Check the motor
data is correct, especially nameplate rpm and motor
volts. Also check that the motor is correctly rated for
the drive.
NEGATIVE SLIP F
Autotune has calculated a negative slip frequency,
which is not valid. Nameplate rpm may have been
set to a value higher than the base speed of the
motor. Check nameplate rpm, base frequency, and
pole pairs are correct.
TR TOO LARGE
The calculated value of rotor time constant is too
large. Check the value of nameplate rpm.
TR TOO SMALL
The calculated value of rotor time constant is too
small. Check the value of nameplate rpm.
MAX RPM DATA ERR
This error is reported when the MAX SPEED RPM is
set to a value outside the range for which Autotune
has gathered data. Autotune gathers data on the
motor characteristics up to 30% beyond “max speed
rpm”. If MAX SPEED RPM is later increased beyond
this range, the drive had no data for this new
operating area, and so will report an error. To run
the motor beyond this point it is necessary to reautotune with MAX SPEED RPM set to a higher value.
STACK TRIP
The drive was unable to distinguish between an
overcurrent/Dsat or overvoltage trip
LEAKGE L TIMEOUT
The leakage inductance measurement requires a test
current to be inserted into the motor. It has not been
possible to achieve the required level of current.
Check that the motor is wired correctly.
POWER LOSS STOP
Power Loss Stop sequence has ramped Speed
Setpoint to zero or timed out
MOTR TURNING ERR
The motor must be stationary when starting the
Autotune
MOTR STALLED ERR
The motor must be able to rotate during Autotune
Table 6-1 Trip Messages
690+ Series AC Drive
Trips and Fault Finding
6-5
Automatic Trip Reset
Using the Keypad, the drive can be configured to automatically attempt to reset a trip when an
attempt is made to start driving the motor, or after a preset time once the trip condition has
occurred. The following function blocks (MMI menus) are used to enable automatic trip resets.
Seq & Ref::Auto Restart (Auto-Reset)
Seq & Ref::Sequencing Logic
Setting Trip Conditions
The following function blocks (MMI menus) are used to set trip conditions:
Trips::I/O Trips
Trips::Trips Status
Viewing Trip Conditions
The following function blocks (MMI menus) can be viewed to investigate trip conditions:
Seq & Ref::Sequencing Logic
Trips::Trips History
Trips::Trips Status
Checksum Fail
When the drive powers-up, non-volatile memory is checked to ensure that it has not been
corrupted. In the rare event of corruption being detected, the drive will not function. This may
occur when replacing the control board with an unprogrammed control board.
Drive Indications
DEFAULT
The failure is indicated by the HEALTH and RUN LEDs showing SHORT FLASH,
.
Referring to Chapter 4: “Operating the Drive” - Reading the Status LEDs, you will note that this
also indicates Re-configuration mode, but this mode (and hence the indication) is not available
to the drive unless controlled by an MMI or Comms link.
Because you are controlling the drive locally (no MMI or Comms link etc.), the unit must be
returned to Parker SSD Drives for reprogramming, refer to Chapter 7: “Routine Maintenance
and Repair”. However, if you have access to an Keypad or suitable PC programming tool, the
unit can be reset.
Keypad Indications (when connected)
The MMI displays the message opposite.
Acknowledge the message by pressing the E key. This
action automatically loads and saves Macro 1 default
parameters and the ENGLISH 50Hz Product Code.
1
* CHECKSUM
FAIL*
1
DEFAULTS
LOADED
HEALTH
LOCAL
If your unit was using a different Product Code or macro,
SEQ
REF
you must reload the Product Code of your choice, reload
the macro of your choice, and perform a Parameter Save (SAVE/COMMAND menu) in that
order.
If data will not save correctly, the Keypad will display a failure message. In this case, the drive
has developed a fault and must be returned to Parker SSD Drives. Refer to Chapter 7: “Routine
Maintenance and Repair".
690+ Series AC Drive
6-6
Trips and Fault Finding
Fault Finding
Problem
Possible Cause
Remedy
Drive will not power-up
Fuse blown
Check supply details, replace with
correct fuse.
Check Product Code against Model
No.
Check all connections are correct
and secure.
Check cable continuity
Faulty cabling
Drive fuse keeps blowing
Faulty cabling or
connections wrong
Faulty drive
Check for problem and rectify
before replacing with correct fuse
Contact Parker SSD Drives
Cannot obtain HEALTH state
Incorrect or no supply
available
Check supply details
Motor will not run at switch-on
Motor jammed
Stop the drive and clear the jam
Motor runs and stops
Motor becomes jammed
Stop the drive and clear the jam
Motor won’t rotate or runs in
reverse
Encoder fault
Check encoder connections
Open circuit speed
reference potentiometer
Check terminal
Table 6-2 Fault Finding
690+ Series AC Drive
Routine Maintenance and Repair
7-1
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR
7
Routine Maintenance
Periodically inspect the drive for build-up of dust or obstructions that may affect ventilation of
the unit. Remove this using dry air.
Repair
There are no user-serviceable components.
IMPORTANT: MAKE NO ATTEMPT TO REPAIR THE UNIT - RETURN IT TO PARKER SSD DRIVES.
Saving Your Application Data
In the event of a repair, application data will be saved whenever possible. However, we advise
you to copy your application settings before returning the unit.
Returning the Unit to Parker SSD Drives
Please have the following information available:
•
•
The model and serial number - see the unit’s rating label
Details of the fault
Contact your nearest Parker SSD Drives Service Centre to arrange return of the item.
You will be given a Returned Material Authorisation. Use this as a reference on all paperwork
you return with the faulty item. Pack and despatch the item in the original packing materials; or
at least an anti-static enclosure. Do not allow packaging chips to enter the unit.
Disposal
This product contains materials which are consignable waste under the Special Waste
Regulations 1996 which complies with the EC Hazardous Waste Directive - Directive
91/689/EEC.
We recommend you dispose of the appropriate materials in accordance with the valid
environmental control laws. The following table shows which materials can be recycled and
which have to be disposed of in a special way.
Material
Recycle
Disposal
metal
yes
no
plastics material
yes
no
printed circuit board
no
yes
The printed circuit board should be disposed of in one of two ways:
1. High temperature incineration (minimum temperature 1200°C) by an incinerator authorised
under parts A or B of the Environmental Protection Act
2. Disposal in an engineered land fill site that is licensed to take aluminium electrolytic
capacitors. Do not dispose of in a land fill site set aside for domestic waste.
Packaging
During transport our products are protected by suitable packaging. This is entirely
environmentally compatible and should be taken for central disposal as secondary raw material.
690+ Series AC Drive
7-2
Routine Maintenance and Repair
690+ Series AC Drive
Technical Specifications
8-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
8
Understanding the Product Code
Model Number (Europe)
The unit is fully identified using a twelve block alphanumeric code which records how the drive
was calibrated, and its various settings when dispatched from the factory.
The Product Code appears as the “Model No.”. Each block of the Product Code is identified as
below:
Typical example:
690PD/0110/400/0011/GR/0/PROF/BO/0/0
This is a Frame D 690+, 11kW, rated at 400V supply, standard livery, IP20, with Keypad fitted
displaying German language, no encoder feedback option, Profibus Option card fitted and
braking option fitted.
Frame B – Model Number (Europe)
Block
No.
Variable
1
690PB
2
XXXX
3
XXX
4
X
Description
Generic product
Four numbers specifying the power output:
0007 = 0.75kW
0015 = 1.5kW
0055 = 5.5kW
0075 = 7.5kW
230
400
500
0022 = 2.2kW
0040 = 4.0kW
220 to 240V (±10%) 50/60Hz
380 to 460V (±10%) 50/60Hz
380 to 500V (±10%) 50/60Hz
One digit specifying the supply phases
1 = Single
3 = Three
5
X
One character specifying the use of the Internal RFI Filter:
F = Internal Supply Filter fitted
0 = Not fitted
6
XXXX
Four digits specifying mechanical package including livery and mechanical
package style, and any keypad (see Note):
First two digits
Livery
00
05
01-04,06-99
Standard Parker SSD Drives livery
Distributor livery
Defined customer liveries
Third digit
Mechanical packaging style
1
2
Fourth digit
0
1
690+ Series AC Drive
Standard (IP20), protected panel mounting with gland
plate
IP20 and falling dirt protection (UL Type 1)
Keypad
No Keypad
6901 Keypad fitted
8-2
Technical Specifications
Frame B – Model Number (Europe)
Block
No.
7
Variable
XX
Description
Two Characters specifying the user interface language including operating
frequency. These characters are the same as used for computer keyboard
specifications:
FR
GR
IT
PL
PO
SP
SW
UK
US
8
X
Characters specifying any feedback option installed over and above the
standard features of the product.
0
HTTL
9
X
X
No option fitted
605B encoder card fitted behind the Keypad/Tech Box
Option site
Characters specifying the communications option (see Note):
0
EI00
PROF
LINK
DNET
10
French (50Hz)
German (50Hz)
Italian (50Hz)
Polish (50Hz)
Portuguese (50Hz)
Spanish (50Hz)
Swedish (50Hz)
English (50Hz)
English (60Hz)
No technology option fitted
RS485 Comms option
Profibus protocol
LINK protocol
DeviceNet
Characters specifying the comms board fitted internally.
0
Not fitted
11
X
Characters specifying the system board fitted internally.
0
Not fitted
SHTTL Fitted – Dual Encoder Option
12
X
Digits specifying engineering special options.
0
No special option
Note: The Keypad and the Comms Technology Box occupy the same physical position in the
product and are therefore mutually exclusive.
Frame C, D, E, F – Model Number (Europe)
Block
No.
1
2
3
Variable
Description
690PC
690PD
690PE
690PF
Characters specifying the generic product:
XXXX
Four numbers specifying the power output:
XXX
690PC =
Frame C
690PD =
Frame D
690PE =
Frame E
690PF =
Frame F
Frame C
Frame D
Frame E
Frame F
0055 = 5.5kW
0075 = 7.5kW
0110 = 11kW
0150 = 15kW
0110 = 11kW
0150 = 15kW
0180 = 18.5kW
0220 = 22kW
0300 = 30kW
0220 = 22kW
0300 = 30kW
0370 = 37kW
0450 = 45kW
0300 = 30kW
0370 = 37kW
0450 = 45kW
0550 = 55kW
0750 = 75kW
0900 = 90kW
0910 = 90kW
(150Hp)
Three numbers specifying the nominal input voltage rating:
230
400
500
220 to 240V (±10%) 50/60Hz
380 to 460V (±10%) 50/60Hz
380 to 500V (±10%) 50/60Hz
690+ Series AC Drive
Technical Specifications
8-3
Frame C, D, E, F – Model Number (Europe)
Block
No.
4
Variable
XXXX
Description
Four digits specifying the mechanical package including livery and
mechanical package style:
First two digits
Livery
00
Standard Parker SSD Drives livery
05
Distributor livery
(01-04, 06-99 - Defined customer liveries )
Third digit
Standard (IP20), protected panel mounting with gland
plate (IP00 or IP20 only for Frame F)
2
3
IP20 and falling dirt protection (UL Type 1)
Enclosed (IP20), with through-panel mounting kit
Fourth digit
0
1
5
XX
Mechanical packaging style
1
Keypad
No Keypad
6901 Keypad option fitted
Two characters specifying the user interface language including operating
frequency. These characters are the same as used for computer keyboard
specifications:
FR
GR
IT
PL
PO
SP
SW
UK
US
6
X
Characters specifying the speed feedback option (Technology Box 1)
installed over and above the standard features of the product:
0
HTTL
7
X
French (50Hz)
German (50Hz)
Italian (50Hz)
Polish (50Hz)
Portuguese (50Hz)
Spanish (50Hz)
Swedish (50Hz)
English (50Hz)
English (60Hz)
No additional option fitted
Wire ended encoder feedback HTTL
Characters specifying the communications option (Technology Box 2):
0
EI00
PROF
LINK
DNET
No technology option fitted
RS485 Comms option
Profibus protocol
LINK protocol
DeviceNet
8
X
Characters specifying the Comms board fitted internally:
9
X
Characters specifying the system board fitted internally:
0
0
SHTTL
10
X
Not fitted
Not fitted
Fitted – Dual Encoder Option
Characters specifying the braking option:
0
Brake power switch not fitted (Frames D, E & F only)
BO
Brake power switch fitted - no braking resistors supplied
Note: External braking resistors should be specified and ordered separately.
11
X
Characters specifying the auxiliary mains power supply.
0
115
230
12
X
Digits specifying engineering special options:
0
690+ Series AC Drive
No auxiliary supply required (Frame C – E)
110 to 120V (±10%), 50/60Hz (Frame F)
220 to 240V (±10%), 50/60Hz (Frame F)
No special option
8-4
Technical Specifications
Catalog Number (North America)
The unit is identified using a 6 block alphanumeric code which records how the drive was
calibrated, and its various settings when dispatched from the factory.
The Product Code appears as the “Cat No.”. Each block of the Product Code is identified as
below:
Typical example:
690+/0010/460/1BN
This is a 10Hp 690+ Frame C, rated at 460 Volts supply, NEMA 1, Braking option fitted, No
System board.
Frame B, C, D, E, F – Catalog Number (North America)
Block
No.
Variable
1
690+
2
X
Description
Generic product
Characters specifying the power output in Hp:
Frame B
Frame D
Frame F
0001 = 1Hp
0002 = 2Hp
0003 = 3Hp
0005 = 5Hp
0007B = 7.5Hp
0010B = 10Hp
0020 = 20Hp
0025 = 25Hp
0030 = 30Hp
0040D = 40Hp
0075 = 75Hp
0100 = 100Hp
0125 = 125Hp
0150 = 150Hp
Frame C
0040 = 40Hp
0050 = 50Hp
0060 = 60Hp
Frame E
0007 = 7.5Hp
0010 = 10Hp
0015 = 15Hp
0020C = 20Hp
3
XXX
Three numbers specifying the nominal input voltage rating:
230
460
4
XXX
230 (±10%) 50/60Hz
380 to 460V (±10%) 50/60Hz
Enclosure options:
1 - Nema 1 (IP20 and falling dirt protection (UL Type 1)
C - Chassis (IP20 only)
5
XX
Characters specifying the braking option:
N Brake power switch not fitted (Frames D & E only)
B Brake power switch fitted - no braking resistors supplied
Note: External braking resistors should be specified and ordered
separately.
6
XX
Characters specifying the systems board:
N Not fitted
S System board fitted
690+ Series AC Drive
Technical Specifications
8-5
Environmental Details
Operating Temperature
Operating temperature is defined as the ambient temperature to the immediate surround of the
drive, when the drive and other equipment adjacent to it is operating at worst case conditions.
0°C to 45°C (0°C to 40°C with top cover fitted), derate up to a maximum of 50°C
0°C to 40°C (0°C to 35°C with top cover fitted), derate up to a maximum of 50°C
CONSTANT
QUADRATIC
Output power is derated linearly at 2% per degree centigrade for temperature exceeding the
maximum rating ambient for the drive.
-25°C to +55°C
-25°C to +70 °C
Wall Mounted
IP40 - top cover surface (Europe)
(top cover must be fitted) IP20 - remainder of surfaces (Europe)
UL (c-UL) Type 1 (North America/Canada)
Cubicle Mounted
IP20 (IP00 or IP20 only for Frame F)
(without top cover fitted) UL (c-UL) Open Type (North America/Canada)
Through-panel Mounted IP20
(without top cover fitted) UL (c-UL) Open Type (North America/Canada)
If greater than 1000m above sea level, derate by 1% per 100m to a maximum of 5000m
Storage Temperature
Shipping Temperature
Product Enclosure Rating
Altitude
Humidity
Atmosphere
Climatic Conditions
Vibration
Maximum 85% relative humidity at 40°C non-condensing
Non flammable, non corrosive and dust free
Class 3k3, as defined by EN50178 (1998)
Test Fc of EN60068-2-6
10Hz<=f<=57Hz sinusoidal 0.075mm amplitude
57Hz<=f<=150Hz sinusoidal 1g
10 sweep cycles per axis on each of three mutually perpendicular axis
Safety
Overvoltage Category
Pollution Degree
Overvoltage Category III (numeral defining an impulse withstand level)
Pollution Degree II (non-conductive pollution, except for temporary condensation)
Pollution Degree III (dirty air rating for through-panel mounted parts)
When fitted inside a cubicle, or when wall-mounted and the top cover is firmly screwed in
position, this product conforms with the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC with amendment
93/68/EEC, Article 13 and Annex III using EN50178 (1998) to show compliance.
Without the top cover fitted, complies with the requirements of UL508C as an open-type drive.
When the top cover is fitted, complies with the requirements of UL508C as Type 1 Enclosed (for
direct wall mounting applications) when specified with Model Number Block 6 (Frame B) or
Modle Number Block 4 (Frame C, D, E, F) designation xx20 or xx21 only.
Europe
North America/Canada
Earthing/Safety Details
Earthing
Input Supply Details
(TN) and (IT)
Prospective Short
Circuit Current (PSCC)
Earth Leakage Current
690+ Series AC Drive
Permanent earthing is mandatory on all units.
•
Use a copper protective earth conductor 10mm² minimum cross-section, or install a second
conductor in parallel with the protective conductor to a separate protective earth terminal
•
The conductor itself must meet local requirements for a protective earth conductor
Drives without filters are suitable for earth (TN) or non-earth referenced (IT) supplies.
The drive is only suitable for earth referenced supplies (TN) when fitted with an internal filter.
External filters are available for use on TN and IT (non-earth referenced) supplies.
Refer to the appropriate Electircal Ratings table.
>10mA (all models)
8-6
Technical Specifications
Cabling Requirements for EMC Compliance
Power
Supply Cable
Motor Cable
External AC
Supply EMC Filter
to Drive Cable
Brake
Resistor
Cable
Signal/Control
Cable
Unscreened
Screened/
armoured
Screened/
armoured
Screened/
armoured
Screened
Segregation
From all
other wiring
(clean)
From all other wiring (noisy)
Length Limitations
With Internal AC Supply
EMC Filter (Frame B)
Unlimited
0.25 - 4.0kW = 50m*
Length Limitations
With External AC
Supply EMC Filter
Unlimited
Cable Type
(for EMC Compliance)
From all other
wiring (sensitive)
25 metres
25 metres
5.5 - 6.0kW = 25m
50 metres
0.3 metres
25 metres
25 metres
Screen to Earth
Connection
Both ends
Both ends
Both ends
Drive end only
Output Choke
300 metres maximum
* Maximum motor cable length under any circumstances
Cooling Fans
The forced-vent cooling of the drive is achieved by 1, or in some cases 2 fans. The Fan Rating
gives the volume of air venting from the drive. All except the Frame F fans are internallysupplied 24V fans.
Drive Product Code
Drive Catalog Code
Fan Ratings
690PB/0007/.., 690PB/0015/.., 690PB/0022/..
& 690PB/0040/..
690+/0001/.., 690+/0002/.., 690+/0003/..
& 690+/0005/..
24cfm (41 m³/hr)
690PB/0055/.. & 690PB/0060/..
690+/0007/.. & 690+/0010/..
30cfm (51 m³/hr)
690PC/0055/..
690+/0055/..
42.5cfm (72 m³/hr)
690PC/0075/..
690+/0010/..
25cfm (42.5 m³/hr)
690PC/0110/.. & 690PC/0150/..
690+/0015/.. & 690+/0020C/..
35cfm (59.5 m³/hr)
FRAME B
FRAME C
FRAME D
690PD/0150, 690PD/0180 & 690PD/0220
690+/0020/.., 690+/0025/.. & 690+/0030/..
55cfm (93.4 m³/hr)
690PD/0300
690+/0040/..
81cfm (138 m³/hr)
All models
160cfm (272 m³/hr)
FRAME E
All models
FRAME F
One single phase fan is provided, supplied from an auxiliary input. There are two voltage variants, either 115V ac or
220Vac. The fan is powered from a single phase supply which uses a capacitor to generate the quadrature phase. Protect
the fan using a 3A fuse.
110/120V : 130W, 10μF, Stator - 16Ω
220/240V : 140W, 2.5μF, Stator - 62Ω
All models
All models
270cfm (459 m³/hr)
690+ Series AC Drive
Technical Specifications
8-7
Electrical Ratings (230V Build Variant)
Power Supply = 220-240V ±10%, 50/60Hz ±5%
Motor power, output current and input current must not be exceeded under steady state
operating conditions.
Operation at 208V ±10% (Frames C, D, E & F)
Nominal motor powers are reduced by 10% when operated at 208V ±10%. Output currents
remain unchanged.
Model Number
(Europe)
Catalog Number
(North America)
Motor
Power
Output
Current
(A)
Input
Current
(A)
Heatsink
Power
Loss
(W)
Total
Power
Loss
(W)
Maximum
Input
Switching Bridge I2t
Frequency
(A2s)
(kHz)
FRAME B : Input currents for kW ratings are at 230V 50Hz ac input and for Hp ratings at 460V 60Hz ac
input. Prospective short circuit rating 10kA.
Constant (Output Overload Motoring 150% for 60s, 180% for 0.5s short term rating)
690PB/0007/230/1/..
690+0001/230../1
690PB/0015/230/1/..
690+0002/230../1
690PB/0022/230/1/..
690+0003/230../1
690PB/0007/230/3/..
690+0001/230..
690PB/0015/230/3/..
690+0002/230..
690PB/0022/230/3/..
690+0003/230..
690PB/0040/230/3/..
690PB/0040/230/3/..
690PB/0040/230/3/..
690+0005/230..
690+0005/230..
690+0005/230..
0.75kW
1Hp
1.5kW
2Hp
2.2kW
3Hp
0.75kW
1Hp
1.5kW
2Hp
2.2kW
3Hp
4kW
4kW
4kW
5Hp
5Hp
5Hp
4.0
4.0
7.0
7.0
10.5
10.5
4.0
4.0
7.0
7.0
10.5
10.5
16.5
14.5
13.0
16.5
14.5
13.0
11
11
19
19
24
24
6
6
10
10
13
13
20
20
20
20
20
20
80
80
120
120
170
170
70
70
100
100
150
150
200
200
200
200
200
200
3, 6, 9
3, 6, 9
3, 6, 9
3, 6, 9
3, 6, 9
3, 6, 9
3, 6, 9
3, 6, 9
3, 6, 9
3, 6, 9
3, 6, 9
3, 6, 9
3
6
9
3
6
9
425
425
425
425
425
425
425
425
425
425
425
425
425
425
425
425
425
425
FRAME C : Input currents for kW ratings are at 230V 50Hz ac input and for Hp ratings at 460V 60Hz ac
input. Prospective short circuit rating 10kA.
Constant (Output Overload Motoring 150% for 60s, 180% for 0.5s short term rating)
690PC/0055/230/3/..
690+0007/230..
690PC/0075/230/3/..
690+0010/230..
5.5kW
7.5Hp
7.5kW
10Hp
22
22
28
28
25
25
33
33
270
270
290
290
330
330
350
350
3
3
3
3
4000
4000
6000
6000
390
390
560
560
3
3
3
3
4000
4000
6000
6000
Quadratic (Output Overload Motoring 110% for 60s, 130% for 0.5s short term rating)
690PC/0055/230/3/..
690+0007/230..
690PC/0075/230/3/..
690+0010/230..
690+ Series AC Drive
7.5kW
10Hp
11kW
15Hp
28
28
42
42
31
31
49.3
49.3
330
330
500
500
8-8
Technical Specifications
Electrical Ratings (230V Build Variant)
Power Supply = 220-240V ±10%, 50/60Hz ±5%
Motor power, output current and input current must not be exceeded under steady state
operating conditions.
Operation at 208V ±10% (Frames C, D, E & F)
Nominal motor powers are reduced by 10% when operated at 208V ±10%. Output currents
remain unchanged.
Model Number
(Europe)
Catalog Number
(North America)
Motor
Power
Output
Current
(A)
Input
Current
(A)
Heatsink
Power
Loss
(W)
Total
Power
Loss
(W)
Maximum
Input
Switching Bridge I2t
Frequency
(A2s)
(kHz)
FRAME D : Input currents for kW ratings are at 230V 50Hz ac input and for Hp ratings at 460V 60Hz ac
input. Prospective short circuit rating 10kA.
Constant (Output Overload Motoring 150% for 60s, 180% for 0.5s short term rating)
690PD/0110/230/3/..
690+0015/230..
690PD/0150/230/3/..
690+0020/230..
690PD/0180/230/3/..
690+0025/230..
11kW
15Hp
15kW
20Hp
18.5kW
25Hp
42
42
54
54
68
68
45
45
53
53
65
65
570
570
670
670
850
850
640
640
740
740
920
920
3
3
3
3
3
3
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
6000
820
820
920
920
3
3
3
3
6000
6000
6000
6000
Quadratic (Output Overload Motoring 110% for 60s, 130% for 0.5s short term rating)
690PD/0110/230/3/..
690+0015/230..
690PD/0150/230/3/..
690+0020/230..
15kW
20Hp
18.5kW
25Hp
54
54
68
68
54
54
65
65
750
750
850
850
FRAME E : Input currents for kW ratings are at 230V 50Hz ac input and for Hp ratings at 460V 60Hz ac
input. Prospective short circuit current 18kA.
Constant (Output Overload Motoring 150% for 60s, 180% for 0.5s short term rating)
690PE/0220/230/3/..
690+0030/230..
22kW
30Hp
80
80
91
91
800
800
920
920
3
3
18000
18000
1200
1200
3
3
18000
18000
Quadratic (Output Overload Motoring 110% for 60s, 130% for 0.5s short term rating)
690PE/0220/230/3/..
690+0030/230..
30kW
40Hp
104
104
116
116
1050
1050
FRAME F : Input currents for kW ratings are at 230V 50Hz ac input and for Hp ratings at 460V 60Hz ac
input. Prospective short circuit current 18kA.
Constant (Output Overload Motoring 150% for 60s, 180% for 0.5s short term rating)
690PF/0300/230/3/..
690+0040/230..
690PF/0370/230/3/..
690+0050/230..
690PF/0450/230/3/..
690+0060/230..
30kW
40Hp
37kW
50Hp
45kW
60Hp
104
104
130
130
154
154
102
102
126
126
148
148
850
850
1100
1100
1200
1200
1100
1100
1450
1450
1650
1650
3
3
3
3
3
3
100000
100000
100000
100000
100000
100000
1500
1500
1800
1800
2100
2100
3
3
3
3
3
3
100000
100000
100000
100000
100000
100000
Quadratic (Output Overload Motoring 110% for 60s, 125% for 0.5s short term rating)
690PF/0300/230/3/..
690+0040/230..
690PF/0370/230/3/..
690+0050/230..
690PF/0450/230/3/..
690+0060/230..
37kW
50Hp
45kW
60Hp
55kW
75Hp
130
130
154
154
192
192
126
126
148
148
184
184
1150
1150
1350
1350
1600
1600
690+ Series AC Drive
Technical Specifications
8-9
Electrical Ratings (400V Build Variant)
Power Supply = 380-460V ±10%, 50/60Hz ±5%
Motor power, output current and input current must not be exceeded under steady state
operating conditions.
Model Number
(Europe)
Catalog Number
(North America)
Motor
Power
Output
Current
(A)
Input
Current
(A)
Heatsink
Power
Loss (W)
Total
Power
Loss
(W)
Maximum
Input
Switching Bridge I2t
Frequency
(A2s)
(kHz)
FRAME B : Input currents for kW ratings are at 400V 50Hz ac input and for Hp ratings at 460V 60Hz ac
input. Prospective short circuit current 10kA.
Constant (Output Overload Motoring 150% for 60s, 180% for 1s short term rating)
0.75kW
2.5
3.7
70
3, 6, 9
340
1Hp
2.5
2.9
65
3, 6, 9
340
1.5kW
4.5
6
100
3, 6, 9
340
2Hp
4.5
5
95
3, 6, 9
340
2.2kW
5.5
8
130
3, 6, 9
340
3Hp
5.5
6.6
120
3, 6, 9
340
690PB/0040/400/3/..
4kW
9.5
12.6
200
3
340
690PB/0040/400/3/..
4kW
8.5
12.6
200
6
340
690PB/0007/400/3/..
690+0001/460/..
690PB/0015/400/3/..
690+0002/460/..
690PB/0022/400/3/..
690+0003/460/..
690PB/0040/400/3/..
4kW
7.5
12.6
200
9
340
690+0005/460/..
5Hp
9.5
10.2
190
3
340
690+0005/460/..
5Hp
8.5
10.2
190
6
340
690+0005/460/..
690PB/0055/400/3/..
690+0007/460/..
690PB/0060/400/3/..
690+0010/460/..
5Hp
7.5
10.2
190
9
340
5.5kW
12
18
220
3
1150
7.5Hp
11
15
200
3
1150
6.0kW
14
19
260
3
1150
10Hp
14
19
250
3
1150
FRAME C : Input currents for kW ratings are at 400V 50Hz ac input, and for Hp ratings at 460V 60Hz ac
input. Prospective short circuit current 10kA.
* For UL Listed products rated at 15kW/20Hp, a supply voltage of 460V is required. The higher
current ratings are applicable to non UL applications only.
Constant (Output Overload Motoring 150% for 60s, 180 % for 0.5s short term rating)
690PC/0055/400/..
5.5kW
690+0007/460/..
690PC/0075/400/..
690+0010/460/..
690PC/0110/400/..
690+0015/460/..
690PC/0150/400/..
690+0020/460/..
12
14.7
7.5Hp
12
12.4
7.5kW
16
19
220
3, 6
1250
155
205
3, 6
1250
240
290
3, 6
4000
4000
170
10Hp
14
16
225
275
3, 6
11kW
23
26.1
280
330
3, 6
4000
4000
15Hp
21
22.1
260
310
3, 6
15kW
30
37
440
500
3
6000
20Hp
27
31.2
410
470
3
6000
7.5kW
16
18.9
260
310
3
1250
10Hp
16
15.6
245
295
3
1250
11kW
23
26.1
300
350
3
4000
15Hp
21
22.1
280
320
3
4000
15kW
30
33.6
440
500
3
4000
20Hp
27
28.5
410
470
3
4000
18.5kW
37
44
550
610
3
6000
25Hp
34
38
530
580
3
6000
Quadratic (Output Overload Motoring 110% for 60s)
690PC/0055/400/..
690+0007/460/..
690PC/0075/400/..
690+0010/460/..
690PC/0110/400/..
* 690+0015/460/..
690PC/0150/400/..
690+0020/460/..
690+ Series AC Drive
8-10
Technical Specifications
Electrical Ratings (400V Build Variant)
Power Supply = 380-460V ±10%, 50/60Hz ±5%
Motor power, output current and input current must not be exceeded under steady state
operating conditions.
Model Number
(Europe)
Catalog Number
(North America)
Motor
Power
Output
Current
(A)
Input
Current
(A)
Heatsink
Power
Loss (W)
Total
Power
Loss
(W)
Maximum
Input
Switching Bridge I2t
Frequency
(A2s)
(kHz)
FRAME D : Input currents for kW ratings are at 400V 50Hz ac input and for Hp ratings at 460V 60Hz ac
input. Prospective short circuit current 10kA.
* For UL Listed products rated at 30kW/40Hp, a supply voltage of 460V is required. The higher
current ratings are applicable to non UL applications only.
Constant (Output Overload Motoring 150% for 60s, 180% for 0.5s short term rating)
690PD/0150/400/..
690+0020/460/..
690PD/0180/400/..
690+0025/460/..
690PD/0220/400/..
690+0030/460/..
690PD/0300/400/..
690+0040/460/..
15kW
31
34.8
420
480
3, 6
4000
20Hp
31
28.5
400
460
3, 6
4000
18.5kW
38
40.5
545
605
3, 6
6000
25Hp
38
34.2
515
575
3, 6
6000
22kW
45
47.2
670
730
3, 6
6000
30Hp
45
40
640
700
3, 6
6000
30kW
59
66
760
860
3
15000
40Hp
52
56
740
830
3
15000
18.5kW
38
40.5
545
605
3
4000
25Hp
38
34.2
515
575
3
4000
22kW
45
47.2
670
730
3
6000
30Hp
45
40
640
700
3
6000
30kW
59
61
760
860
3
6000
40Hp
52
51
740
830
3
6000
37kW
73
84
920
1030
3
15000
50Hp
65
68
890
980
3
15000
Quadratic (Output Overload Motoring 110% for 60s)
690PD/0150/400/..
690+0020/460/..
690PD/0180/400/..
690+0025/460/..
690PD/0220/400/..
* 690+0030/460/..
690PD/0300/400/..
690+0040/460/..
FRAME E : Input currents for kW ratings are at 400V 50Hz ac input and for Hp ratings at 460V 60Hz ac
input. Prospective short circuit current 18kA.
* For UL Listed products rated at 30kW/40Hp, a supply voltage of 460V is required. The higher
current ratings are applicable to non UL applications only.
Constant (Output Overload Motoring 150% for 60s, 180% for 0.5s short term rating)
690PE/0300/400/..
690+0040/460/..
690PE/0370/400/..
690+0050/460/..
690PE/0450/400/..
690+0060/460/..
30kW
59
68
590
690
3, 6
15000
40Hp
59
57
590
690
3, 6
15000
37kW
73
81
730
850
3, 6
18000
50Hp
73
68
730
850
3, 6
18000
45kW
87
95
880
880
3, 6
18000
60Hp
87
80
880
880
3, 6
18000
73
81
733
848
3
15000
Quadratic (Output Overload Motoring 110% for 60s)
690PE/0300/400/..
37kW
690+0040/460/..
690PE/0370/400/..
690+0050/460/..
690PE/0450/400/..
690+0060/460/..
50Hp
73
68
733
848
3
15000
45kW
87
95
901
1029
3
18000
60Hp
87
80
901
1029
3
18000
55kW
105
110
1094
1242
3
18000
75Hp
105
95
1094
1242
3
18000
690+ Series AC Drive
Technical Specifications
8-11
Electrical Ratings (400V Build Variant)
Power Supply = 380-460V ±10%, 50/60Hz ±5%
Motor power, output current and input current must not be exceeded under steady state
operating conditions.
Model Number
(Europe)
Catalog Number
(North America)
Motor
Power
Output
Current
(A)
Input
Current
(A)
Heatsink
Power
Loss (W)
Total
Power
Loss
(W)
Maximum
Input
Switching Bridge I2t
Frequency
(A2s)
(kHz)
FRAME F : Input currents for kW ratings are at 400V 50Hz ac input and for Hp ratings at 460V 60Hz ac
input. Prospective short circuit current 18kA.
Constant (Output Overload Motoring 150% for 60s, 180% for 0.5s short term rating)
690PF/0550/400/..
690+0075/460/..
690PF/0750/400/..
690+0100/460/..
55kW
105
114
920
1220
3
100,000
75Hp
100
99
900
1130
3
100,000
75kW
145
143
1320
1670
3
100,000
100Hp
130
124
1200
1500
3
100,000
90kW
180
164
1490
1950
3
100,000
690+0125/460/..
125Hp
156
148
1340
1780
3
100,000
90kW
180
164
1490
1950
3
100,000
690+0150/460/..
150Hp
180
169
1670
2180
3
100,000
75kW
145
143
1400
1670
3
100,000
100Hp
125
124
1200
1500
3
100,000
90kW
165
164
1580
1950
3
100,000
690PF/0900/400/..
690PF/0910/400/..
Quadratic (Output Overload Motoring 110% for 60s)
690PF/0550/400/..
690+0075/460/..
690PF/0750/400/..
690+0100/460/..
690PF/0900/400/..
690+0125/460/..
690PF/0910/400/..
690+0150/460/..
690+ Series AC Drive
125Hp
156
148
1340
1780
3
100,000
110kW
205
195
1800
1950
3
100,000
150Hp
180
169
1670
2180
3
100,000
110kW
205
195
1800
1950
3
100,000
150Hp
180
169
1670
2180
3
100,000
8-12
Technical Specifications
Electrical Ratings (500V Build Variant)
Power Supply = 380-500V ±10%, 50/60Hz ±5%
500V unit full power ratings are only available at 500V. The unit can be operated
between 380-500V supply voltage with reduced output power below 500V.
Motor power, output current and input current must not be exceeded under steady state
operating conditions.
Note:
Model Number
(Europe)
The improved ratings offered by software versions 5.4 onwards are made possible by
internal hardware changes to the drive. The ratings are not achievable on older drives
running software versions 5.4 onwards.
Catalog Number
(North America)
Motor
Power
Output
Current
(A)
Input
Current
(A)
Heatsink
Power
Loss (W)
Total
Power
Loss
(W)
Maximum
Input
Switching Bridge I2t
Frequency
(A2s)
(kHz)
FRAME B : Input currents for kW ratings are at 500V 50Hz ac input. Prospective short circuit current 10kA.
Constant (Output Overload Motoring 150% for 60s, 180% for 1s short term rating)
690PB/0022/500/3/..
2.2kW
5
6.5
110
3
1150
690PB/0040/500/3/..
4kW
8
10.4
165
3
1150
690PB/0055/500/3/..
5.5kW
11
15.3
200
3
1150
FRAME C : Input currents for kW ratings are at 500V 50Hz ac input. Prospective short circuit current 10kA.
Constant (Output Overload Motoring 150% for 60s, 180% for 0.5s short term rating)
690PC/0055/500/..
5.5kW
11
14
155
275
3, 6
1250
690PC/0075/500/..
7.5kW
14
22
225
310
3, 6
4000
690PC/0110/500/..
11kW
21
26
260
470
3, 6
4000
690PC/0150/500/..
15kW
27
29.7
410
605
3
6000
Quadratic (Output Overload Motoring 110% for 60s)
690PC/0055/500/..
7.5kW
14
20
225
300
3
1250
690PC/0075/500/..
11kW
21
26
260
350
3
4000
690PC/0110/500/..
15kW
27
32
410
310
3
4000
690PC/0150/500/..
18.5kW
34
36
545
470
3
6000
FRAME D : Input currents for kW ratings at 500V 50Hz ac input. Prospective short circuit current 10kA.
Constant (Output Overload Motoring 150% for 60s, 180% for 0.5s short term rating)
690PD/0150/500/..
15kW
28
27
420
480
3, 6
4000
690PD/0180/500/..
18.5kW
36
33
545
605
3, 6
6000
690PD/0220/500/..
22kW
42
39
670
730
3, 6
6000
690PD/0300/500/..
30kW
52
54
740
830
3
15000
Quadratic (Output Overload Motoring 110% for 60s)
690PD/0150/500/..
18.5kW
36
33
420
480
3, 6
4000
690PD/0180/500/..
22kW
42
39
545
605
3, 6
6000
690PD/0220/500/..
30kW
52
50
670
730
3, 6
6000
690PD/0300/500/..
37kW
65
68
890
980
3
15000
690+ Series AC Drive
Technical Specifications
8-13
Electrical Ratings (500V Build Variant)
Power Supply = 380-500V ±10%, 50/60Hz ±5%
500V unit full power ratings are only available at 500V. The unit can be operated
between 380-500V supply voltage with reduced output power below 500V.
Motor power, output current and input current must not be exceeded under steady state
operating conditions.
Note:
Model Number
(Europe)
The improved ratings offered by software versions 5.4 onwards are made possible by
internal hardware changes to the drive. The ratings are not achievable on older drives
running software versions 5.4 onwards.
Catalog Number
(North America)
Motor
Power
Output
Current
(A)
Input
Current
(A)
Heatsink
Power
Loss (W)
Total
Power
Loss
(W)
Maximum
Input
Switching Bridge I2t
Frequency
(A2s)
(kHz)
FRAME E : Input currents for kW ratings at 500V 50Hz ac input. Prospective short circuit current 18kA.
Constant (Output Overload Motoring 150% for 60s, 180% for 0.5s short term rating)
690PE/0300/500/..
30kW
54
55
647
749
3, 6
15000
690PE/0370/500/..
37kW
67
69
799
911
3, 6
18000
690PE/0450/500/..
45kW
79
82
957
1083
3, 6
18000
Quadratic (Output Overload Motoring 110% for 60s)
690PE/0300/500/..
37kW
67
67
623
738
3
15000
690PE/0370/500/..
45kW
79
82
766
894
3
18000
690PE/0450/500/..
55kW
98
98
930
1078
3
18000
FRAME F : Input currents for kW ratings at 500V 50Hz ac input. Prospective short circuit current 18kA.
Constant (Output Overload Motoring 150% for 60s, 180% for 0.5s short term rating)
690PF/0550/500/..
55kW
100
93
900
1130
3
100,000
690PF/0750/500/..
75kW
125
118
1200
1500
3
100,000
690PF/0900/500/..
90kW
156
140
1340
1780
3
100,000
Quadratic (Output Overload Motoring 110% for 60s)
690PF/0550/500/..
75kW
125
118
1200
1500
3
100,000
690PF/0750/500/..
90kW
156
140
1340
1780
3
100,000
690PF/0090/500/..
110kW
180
166
1670
2180
3
100,000
690+ Series AC Drive
8-14
Technical Specifications
Input Fuse Ratings (Europe)
Refer to Chapter 9 for North American fuse ratings.
Product Code
Model Number
Frame B
690PB/0007/230/1/..
690PB/0015/230/1/..
690PB/0022/230/1/..
690PB/0007/230/3/..
690PB/0015/230/3/..
690PB/0022/230/3/..
690PB/0040/230/3/..
Frame D
690PD/0110/230/3/..
690PD/0150/230/3/..
690PD/0180/230/3/..
Frame F
690PF/0300/230/3/..
690PF/0370/230/3/..
690PF/0450/230/3/..
Frame B
690PB/0007/400/3/..
690PB/0015/400/3/..
690PB/0022/400/3/..
690PB/0040/400/3/..
690PB/0055/400/3/..
690PB/0060/400/3/..
Frame D
690PD/0150/400/3/..
690PD/0180/400/3/..
690PD/0220/400/3/..
690PD/0300/400/3/..
Frame F
690PF/0550/400/3/..
690PF/0750/400/3/..
690PF/0900/400/3/..
690PF/0910/400/3/..
Frame B
690PB/0022/500/3/..
690PB/0040/500/3/..
690PB/0055/500/3/..
Frame D
690PD/0150/500/3/..
690PD/0180/500/3/..
690PD/0220/500/3/..
690PD/0300/500/3/..
Frame F
690PF/0550/500/3/..
690PF/0750/500/3/..
690PF/0900/500/3/..
Input Fuse Rating (A)
Product Code
Constant
Quadratic
Model Number
230V BUILD VARIANT 220-240V ±10%, 45-65Hz *
12
20
25
10
12
16
20
-
50
63
80
63
80
-
Input Fuse Rating (A)
Constant
Quadratic
Frame C
690PC/0055/230/3/..
690PC/0075/230/3/..
25
40
32
50
Frame E
690PE/0220/230/3/..
100
125
Frame C
690PC/0055/400/3/..
690PC/0075/400/3/..
690PC/0110/400/3/..
690PC/0150/400/3/..
16
20
32
40
20
32
40
50
Frame E
690PE/0300/400/3/..
690PE/0370/400/3/..
690PE/0450/400/3/..
80
100
100
100
100
125
16
25
32
32
20
32
32
40
63
80
100
80
100
100
125
160
160
160
160
200
400V BUILD VARIANT 380-460V ±10%, 45-65Hz *
6
8
10
16
20
20
-
40
50
50
80
50
50
63
100
125
160
160
200
200
200
200
200
500V BUILD VARIANT 380-500V ±10%, 45-65Hz *
8
12
16
-
32
40
40
63
40
40
50
80
100
125
160
* Note : Frame
Frame C
690PC/0055/500/3/..
690PC/0075/500/3/..
690PC/0110/500/3/..
690PC/0150/500/3/..
Frame E
690PE/0300/500/3/..
690PE/0370/500/3/..
690PE/0450/500/3/..
125
160
200
B only is 50Hz ±5% or 60Hz ±5%
690+ Series AC Drive
Technical Specifications
8-15
External AC Supply (RFI) Filters
Drive
Filter Part No.
Motor Power
(kW/Hp)
CO467841U020
(TN Filter)
Frame B
CO467842U020
(TN/IT Filter)
CO467841U044
(TN Filter)
Frame C
CO467842U044
(TN/IT Filter)
CO467841U084
(TN Filter)
Frame D
CO467842U084
(TN/IT Filter)
CO467841U105
(TN Filter)
Frame E
CO467842U105
(TN/IT Filter)
CO467841U215
(TN Filter)
Frame F
CO467842U215
(TN/IT Filter)
Phase
0.75-6/1-10
constant
3
5.5-15/7.5-20
constant
7.5-18.5/10-25
quadratic
3
15-30/20-40
constant
18.5-37/25-50
quadratic
3
30-45/40-60
constant
37-55/50-75
quadratic
3
55-90/75-150
constant
75-110/100-150
quadratic
3
Watt
Loss
(W)
Fault
Leakage
Current
(mA)
10
36
Current
(A)
Maximum
Supply
Voltage
(V)
EMC
Performance
Class
Maximum
Motor
Cable
Length (m)
B
50
B
50
B
50
B
50
B
50
480
20
10
38
22
77
500
480
44
22
80
30
82
500
480
84
30
86
36
217
500
480
105
36
200
67
432
500
480
215
67
450
500
Filters suitable for 50-60Hz ±5%, switching frequency 3 kHz only
EMC Compliance
Standard EN
Conducted
emissions
Table 9
61800-3
First
Environment
Unrestricted
Distribution
Conducted
emissions
Table 9
First
Environment
Restricted
Distribution
First
Environment
Unrestricted
Distribution
First
Environment
Restricted
Distribution
Second
environment
Where I<=100A
Radiated
Emissions
Table 10
Radiated
Emissions
Table 10
Conducted
emissions
Table 11
Conducted
emissions
Table 11
Radiated
Emissions
Table 12
Second
environment
Where I>=100A
Second
environment
690+ Series AC Drive
Frame B
Up to 4.0kW
when fitted with
the internal
filter
Over 4.0kW
when fitted with
the specified
external filter
Over 4.0kW
when fitted with
the internal
filter
Frame C
When fitted
with the
specified
external filter
Frame D
When fitted
with the
specified
external filter
Frame E
When fitted
with the
specified
external filter
Frame F
When fitted
with the
specified
external filter
When fitted
with the
specified
external filter
When fitted
with the
specified
external filter
When fitted
with the
specified
external filter
When fitted
with the
specified
external filter
Up to 4.0kW
No
No
No
No
Above 4.0kW
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8-16
Technical Specifications
Internal Dynamic Brake Switch (Frame B)
Model Number
(Europe)
Motor
Power
(kW/hp)
Brake Switch
Peak Current
(A)
Peak Brake
Dissipation
(kW/hp)
Minimum
Brake Resistor
Value (Ω)
100% duty continuous
230V Build Variant: 220-240V ±10% DC link brake voltage: 390V
690PB/0007/230/1/..
0.75/1
10
4/5
56
690PB/0015/230/1/..
1.5/2
10
4/5
56
690PB/0022/230/1/..
2.2/3
10
4/5
56
690PB/0007/230/3/..
0.75/1
10
4/5
56
690PB/0015/230/3/..
1.5/2
10
4/5
56
690PB/0022/230/3/..
2.2/3
10
4/5
56
690PB/0040/230/3/..
4/5
15
6/8
33
400V Build Variant: 380-460V ±10% DC link brake voltage: 750V
690PB/0007/400/3/..
0.75/1
10
7.5/10
100
690PB/0015/400/3/..
1.5/2
10
7.5/10
100
690PB/0022/400/3/..
2.2/3
10
7.5/10
100
690PB/0040/400/3/..
4/5
10
7.5/10
100
690PB/0055/400/3/..
5.5/7.5
10
7.5/10
80
690PB/0060/400/3/..
6.0/10
10
7.5/10
80
500V Build Variant: 500V ±10% DC link brake voltage: 750V
690PB/0007/500/3/..
0.75/1
10
7.5/10
100
690PB/0015/500/3/..
1.5/2
10
7.5/10
100
690PB/0022/500/3/..
2.2/3
10
7.5/10
100
690PB/0040/500/3/..
4/5
10
7.5/10
100
690PB/0055/500/3/..
5.5/7.5
10
7.5/10
90
Internal Dynamic Brake Switch (Frame C)
Model Number
(Europe)
Motor
Power
(kW/hp)
Brake Switch
Peak Current
(A)
Peak Brake
Dissipation
(kW/hp)
Brake Switch
Continuous
Current (A)
Continuous Brake
Dissipation
(kW/hp)
Minimum
Brake Resistor
Value (Ω)
20s maximum, 30% duty
230V Build Variant: 220-240V ±10% DC link brake voltage: 390V
690PC/0055/230/..
5.5/7.5
13.5
5.2/6.9
4.0
1.6/2.1
29
690PC/0075/230/..
7.5/10
17.7
6.9/9.2
5.3
2.1/2.8
22
400V Build Variant: 380-460V ±10%, 45-65Hz DC link brake voltage: 750V
690PC/0055/400/..
5.5/7.5
7.5
5.5/7.5
2.3
1.7/2.3
100
690PC/0075/400/..
7.5/10
15
11/15
4.5
3.4/4.5
50
690PC/0110/400/..
11/15
15
11/15
4.5
3.4/4.5
50
690PC/0150/400/..
15/20
15
11/15
4.5
3.4/4.5
50
500V Build Variant: 500V ±10%, 45-65Hz DC link brake voltage: 815V
690PC/0055/500/..
5.5/7.5
7.5
6.1/8.2
2.25
1.8/2.5
100
690PC/0075/500/..
7.5/10
15
12.2/16.3
4.5
3.7/4.9
50
690PC/0110/500/..
11/15
15
12.2/16.3
4.5
3.7/4.9
50
690PC/0150/500/..
15/20
15
12.2/16.3
4.5
3.7/4.9
50
690+ Series AC Drive
Technical Specifications
8-17
Internal Dynamic Brake Switch (Frame D)
Model Number
(Europe)
Motor
Power
(kW/hp)
Brake Switch
Peak Current
(A)
Peak Brake
Dissipation
(kW/hp)
Brake Switch
Continuous
Current (A)
Continuous Brake
Dissipation
(kW/hp)
Minimum
Brake Resistor
Value
(Ω)
20s maximum, 30% duty
230V Build Variant: 220-240V ±10% DC link brake voltage: 390V
690PD/0110/230/..
11/15
28
10.9/14.5
8.4
3.3/4.4
14
690PD/0150/230/..
15/20
39
15.2/20.3
11.7
4.6/6.1
10
690PD/0180/230/..
18.5/25
49
19.0/25.3
14.7
5.7/7.6
8
400V Build Variant: 380-460V ±10%, 45-65Hz DC link brake voltage: 750V
690PD/0150/400/..
15/20
30
22/30
9.5
7/10
27
690PD/0180/400/..
18.5/25
30
22/30
9.5
7/10
27
690PD/0220/400/..
22/30
30
22/30
9.5
7/10
27
690PD/0300/400/..
30/37
37
30/40
12.5
9/12
21
500V Build Variant: 500V ±10%, 45-65Hz DC link brake voltage: 815V
690PD/0150/500/..
15/20
27
22/30
8.5
7/10
33
690PD/0180/500/..
18.5/25
27
22/30
8.5
7/10
33
690PD/0220/500/..
22/30
27
22/30
8.5
7/10
33
690PD/0300/500/..
30/37
34
30/40
11
9/12
24
Continuous Brake
Dissipation
(kW/hp)
Minimum
Brake Resistor
Value
(Ω)
Internal Dynamic Brake Switch (Frame E)
Model Number
(Europe)
Motor
Power
(kW/hp)
Brake Switch
Peak Current
(A)
Peak Brake
Dissipation
(kW/hp)
Brake Switch
Continuous
Current (A)
20s maximum, 30% duty
230V Build Variant: 220-240V ±10% DC link brake voltage: 390V
690PE/0220/230/..
22/30
56
21.7/28.9
16.8
6.5/8.7
7
400V Build Variant: 380-460V ±10%, 45-65Hz DC link brake voltage: 750V
690PE/0300/400/..
30/40
40
30/40
12
9/12
19
690PE/0370/400/..
37/50
50
37/50
15
10.5/14
15
690PE/0450/400/..
45/60
60
45/60
18
13.5/18
12
500V Build Variant: 500V ±10%, 45-65Hz DC link brake voltage: 820V
690PE/0300/500/..
30/40
37
30/40
11
9/12
22
690PE/0370/500/..
37/50
46
37/50
14
10.5/14
18
690PE/0450/500/..
45/60
55
45/60
17
13.5/18
15
690+ Series AC Drive
8-18
Technical Specifications
Internal Dynamic Brake Switch (Frame F)
Model Number
(Europe)
Motor
Power
(kW/hp)
Brake Switch
Peak Current
(A)
Peak Brake
Dissipation
(kW/hp)
Brake Switch
Continuous
Current (A)
Continuous Brake
Dissipation
(kW/hp)
Minimum
Brake Resistor
Value
(Ω)
20s maximum, 25% duty
230V Build Variant: 220-240V ±10% DC link brake voltage: 390V
690PF/0300/230/..
30/40
94
30/41
23.4
23/12
5
690PF/0370/230/..
37/50
107
38/51
29.4
11/15
4
690PF/0450/230/..
45/60
125
51/68
39.0
15/20
3
400V Build Variant: 380-460V ±10%, 45-65Hz DC link brake voltage: 750V
690PF/0550/400/..
55/75
94
62/83
25
18/25
8
690PF/0750/400/..
75/100
125
90/125
32
24/32
6
690PF/0900/400/..
90/125
136
102/137
32
24/32
5.5
690P/0910/400/..
90/150
136
102/137
32
24/32
5.5
500V Build Variant: 500V ±10%, 45-65Hz DC link brake voltage: 820V
690PF/0550/500/..
55/75
82
68
25
20.5/27
10
690PF/0750/500/..
75/100
102
83
31
25.5/34
8
690PF/0900/500/..
90/125
102
83
31
25.5/34
8
690+ Series AC Drive
Technical Specifications
8-19
Control Terminals
Terminal Name
Range
No.
ANALOG I/O TERMINAL BLOCK
Description
(Default functions are for Macro 1)
This is a 10-way connector carrying all customer analog I/O.
1
2
0V
AIN1 (SPEED)
3
AIN2 (TRIM)
4
5
6
AIN3
AIN4
AOUT1 (RAMP)
7
AOUT2
0-10V, ±10V, 0-20V
0-20mA, 4-20mA
0-10V, ±10V, 0-20V
0-20mA, 4-20mA
0-10V, ±10V, 0-20V
0-10V, ±10V, 0-20V
0-10V, 0-20mA,
4-20mA
±10V
8
AOUT3
±10V
9
+10V REF
10V
10
-10V REF
-10V
0V reference for analog i/o
Configurable analog input
Default function = Speed Setpoint
Configurable analog input
Default function = Speed Trim
Configurable analog input
Configurable analog input
Configurable analog output
Default function = Ramp Output
Configurable analog output
No default function
Configurable analog output
No default function
10V reference for analog i/o
Load 10mA maximum
-10V reference for analog i/o
Load 10mA maximum
DIGITAL INPUT TERMINAL BLOCK
This is a 10-way connector carrying all digital inputs.
11
12
0V
DIN1 (RUN FWD)
0-24V
13
DIN2 (RUN REV)
0-24V
14
DIN3 (NOT STOP)
0-24V
15
DIN4 (REMOTE REVERSE)
0-24V
16
DIN 5 (JOG)
0-24V
17
DIN6
0-24V
18
DIN7 (REMOTE TRIP
RESET)
0-24V
19
DIN8 (EXT TRIP)
0-24V
20
+24VC
RELAY OUTPUT TERMINAL BLOCK
All inputs below 24V=high , 0V=low
Configurable digital input
Default function = RUN FWD
0V = Stop, 24V = Run
Configurable digital input
Default function = RUN REV
0V = Stop, 24V = Run
Configurable digital input
Default function = NOT STOP
0V = Stop, 24V = Run
Configurable digital input
Default function = DIRECTION
0V = Forward, 24V = Reverse
Configurable digital input
Default function = JOG
24V = Jog, 0V = Stop
Configurable digital input
No default function
Configurable digital input
Default function = TRIP RESET
24V = Reset
Non-configurable digital input
Default function = EXTERNAL TRIP (active low)
24V = No Trip, 0V = Trip
Customer +24V (max load 150mA)
Relay outputs are volt free, normally open contacts. Rated to 230V 3A resistive load.
Alternatively they may be used down to 1mA, 12V levels. This is a 6-way connector.
21
22
23
24
25
26
DOUT1_A
DOUT1_B
DOUT2_A
DOUT2_B
DOUT3_A
DOUT3_B
690+ Series AC Drive
normally-open relay
contacts
Default function DOUT1 closed = healthy
normally-open relay
contacts
Default function DOUT2 closed = running
normally-open relay
contacts
No default function
8-20
Technical Specifications
System Board Terminals (option)
Terminal Name
No.
Terminal A
1
External 0V
2
DIGIO11
3
DIGIO12
4
DIGIO13
5
DIGIO14
6
DIGIO15
Range
Description
(Default functions are for Macro 1)
12 3 45 6
Terminal B
User-supplied 0V reference
Configurable digital input/output
If driving a relay coil with
Configurable digital input/output
a digital output we
Configurable digital input/output
recommend to fit a
flywheel diode across the Configurable digital input/output
coil.
Configurable digital input/output
12 3 4 56 789
1
External 24V In
24V dc (±10%) 1A
2
Reference Encoder A
Input
3
Reference Encoder /A
Input
4
Reference Encoder B
Input
5
Reference Encoder /B
Input
6
Reference Encoder Z
Input
7
Reference Encoder /Z
Input
8
Encoder Supply Out
9
External 0V
5V, 12V, 18V, 24V
User-supplied power supply
User selectable (max load 500mA)
User-supplied 0V reference
Terminal C
12 3 45 6
1
Slave Encoder A
Input
2
Slave Encoder /A
Input
3
Slave Encoder B
Input
4
Slave Encoder /B
Input
5
Slave Encoder Z
Input
6
Slave Encoder /Z
Input
Terminal D
12 3 45 6
1
Repeat Encoder Output A
Output (repeats Slave Encoder)
2
Repeat Encoder Output /A
Output (repeats Slave Encoder)
3
Repeat Encoder Output B
Output (repeats Slave Encoder)
4
Repeat Encoder Output /B
Output (repeats Slave Encoder)
5
Repeat Encoder Output Z
Output (repeats Slave Encoder)
6
Repeat Encoder Output /Z
Output (repeats Slave Encoder)
690+ Series AC Drive
Technical Specifications
8-21
Analog Inputs/Outputs
Inputs
Output
Range
0-10V, ±10V, 0-20mA or 4-20mA
(range set in software)
0-10V (10mA maximum), 0-20mA or 4-20mA
(range set in software)
Impedance
Voltage range = 47kΩ
Current range = 220Ω
Voltage range = 100Ω
Recommended Load - 220Ω
Resolution
10 bits (1 in 1024)
10 bits (1 in 1024)
Sample Rate
5ms (one selected input can be 1ms)
5ms
System Board
With System Board option fitted, the ±10V range is enhanced as follows:
Range
±10V (range set in software)
Impedance
Voltage range = 14kΩ
Resolution
12 bit + sign ( 1 in 8192)
Sample Rate
5ms (one selected input can be 1ms)
Digital Inputs
Operating Range
+30V
0-5V dc = OFF, 15-24V dc = ON
(-30V dc absolute minimum, +30V dc absolute maximum)
24V
15V
5V
0V
ON
threshold
OFF
-30V
Input Impedance
6.8kΩ
Sample Rate
5ms
Digital Outputs
These are volt-free relay contacts. 50V dc max, 0.3A max (for inductive loads up to
L/R=40ms, a suitable freewheel diode must be used).
Maximum Voltage
230V ac
Maximum Current
3A resistive load
System Board Digital Inputs/Outputs (DIGIO11-15)
These are individually, user-configurable as an Input or Output. Refer to the Software
Product Manual, Chapter 1: “Programming Your Application” – DIGITAL INPUTS and
DIGITAL OUTPUTS.
Input
Maximum Voltage
Output
EXT 24Vin + 0.6V
24V dc
Maximum Current
Operating Range
100mA
0-5V dc = OFF,
15-24V dc = ON
(-30V dc absolute
minimum, +30V dc
absolute maximum)
Input Impedance
6.8kΩ
Sample Rate
5ms
690+ Series AC Drive
EXT 24Vin
+ 0.6V
24V
ON
15V
threshold
5V
OFF
0V
EXT 24Vin
- 0.6V
24V dc = ON *
0V dc = OFF
* range: 19.1V (full load) to 25.1V (no load)
5ms
8-22
Technical Specifications
Supply Harmonic Analysis (Frame B Constant)
(With or without the internal filter)
Assumptions: 10000A short circuit supply capability, equivalent to 73μH supply
impedance at 400V where Q1n is the rated rms value of the fundamental voltage of
the supply transformer. The results conform to stage 1, stage 2 and stage 3 of the THD(V) x 100
Engineering Recommendation G.5/3 September 1976, Classification ‘C’: Limits
for Harmonics in the UK Electricity Industry.
Fundamental
230
400
Voltage (V)
Drive Type
Single Phase
Three Phase
Motor Power
0.75 1.5
2.2 0.75 1.5
2.2
4.0 0.75 1.5
2.2
4.0
5.5
6.0
(kW)
Typical
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
Motor
Efficiency %
Harmonic
No.
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Total RMS
Current (A)
THD (V) %
h= 2
=
∑ Q h2
h = 40
Q 1n
%
500
2.2
4.0
5.5
90
90
90
RMS Current (A)
3.8
7.5
11.0
2.1
4.2
3.7
7.2
10.5
0.0
0.0
3.5
6.7
9.6
2.0
3.9
3.3
6.1
8.4
1.9
3.6
3.0
5.3
7.0
0.0
2.6
4.4
5.5
1.7
2.2
3.5
4.0
1.9
2.6
1.5
1.1
6.2
11.4
1.2
2.5
3.6
6.5
8.9
9.7
2.8
5.2
7.1
0.1
0.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
5.7
10.0
1.2
2.3
3.4
6.0
8.1
8.8
2.7
4.8
6.6
5.1
8.9
1.1
2.2
3.2
5.6
7.4
8.0
2.5
4.5
6.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
2.9
3.9
5.9
1.0
1.9
2.6
4.4
5.5
5.9
2.1
3.6
4.8
1.5
2.5
3.1
4.4
0.9
1.8
2.3
3.8
4.5
4.8
1.9
3.1
4.0
2.6
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.8
1.5
1.2
1.6
1.8
1.8
0.8
1.5
1.6
2.5
2.6
2.7
1.3
2.1
2.6
1.1
0.6
1.0
1.3
1.2
0.9
0.7
1.3
1.3
1.9
1.7
1.8
1.1
1.6
1.9
0.8
0.5
0.2
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.5
0.2
0.4
0.7
0.6
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.9
0.7
0.9
0.6
0.5
0.7
0.8
0.8
0.3
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.6
0.5
0.7
0.5
0.5
0.3
0.3
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.1
0.3
0.4
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.3
0.5
0.3
0.4
0.2
0.2
0.4
0.5
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.1
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.4
0.5
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
8.9
16.2
22.4
4.6
8.1
11.2
19.2
2.8
5.4
7.2
12.4
16.2
17.5
5.8
10.0
13.5
0.37 0.64 0.80 0.46 0.67 0.83 1.22 0.19 0.33 0.37 0.58 0.68 0.73 0.31 0.48 0.62
690+ Series AC Drive
8-23
Technical Specifications
Supply Harmonic Analysis (Frame C Constant)
Assumptions: 10000A short circuit supply capability, equivalent
to 73μH supply impedance at 400V where Q1n is the rated rms
value of the fundamental voltage of the supply transformer. The
results conform to stage 1, stage 2 and stage 3 of the
Engineering Recommendation G.5/3 September 1976,
Classification ‘C’: Limits for Harmonics in the UK Electricity
Industry.
Fundamental
Voltage (V)
Drive Type
Motor Power
(kW)
Typical
Motor
Efficiency %
Harmonic
No.
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Total RMS
Current (A)
THD (V) %
690+ Series AC Drive
230
h= 2
∑ Q h2
THD(V) x 100 =
400
h = 40
Q 1n
%
500
Three Phase
5.5
7.5
5.5
7.5
11.0
15.0
5.5
7.5
11.0
15.0
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
9.7
17.8
18.6
19.5
RMS Current (A)
18.5
23.8
10.1
13.0
18.6
25.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
13.0
18.0
7.9
10.3
14.2
19.9
7.7
13.9
14.4
15.9
8.9
13.3
6.1
8.1
10.8
15.6
6.0
10.7
11.0
12.8
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
2.2
4.6
2.4
3.6
4.0
6.8
2.6
4.3
4.3
6.2
1.2
2.0
1.2
1.9
1.8
3.5
1.4
2.1
2.1
3.5
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.0
1.5
0.6
0.8
1.2
1.5
0.6
1.2
1.2
1.2
0.6
1.3
0.6
0.9
1.1
1.5
0.6
1.1
1.1
1.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.5
0.6
0.3
0.5
0.5
0.9
0.3
0.6
0.6
0.9
0.4
0.6
0.3
0.3
0.5
0.6
0.3
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.3
0.4
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.2
0.4
0.4
0.5
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.5
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.5
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.2
0.3
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.3
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
24.5
33.2
14.5
18.9
26.2
36.5
14.2
25.5
26.5
29.2
0.57
0.86
0.40
0.54
0.70
1.03
0.40
0.70
0.72
0.87
8-24
Technical Specifications
Supply Harmonic Analysis (Frame C Quadratic)
Assumptions: 10000A short circuit supply capability, equivalent
to 73μH supply impedance at 400V where Q1n is the rated rms
value of the fundamental voltage of the supply transformer. The
results conform to stage 1, stage 2 and stage 3 of the
Engineering Recommendation G.5/3 September 1976,
Classification ‘C’: Limits for Harmonics in the UK Electricity
Industry.
Fundamental
Voltage (V)
Drive Type
Motor Power
(kW)
Typical
Motor
Efficiency %
Harmonic
No.
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Total RMS
Current (A)
THD (V) %
230
h= 2
∑ Q h2
THD(V) x 100 =
400
h = 40
Q 1n
%
500
Three Phase
5.5
90
7.5
5.5
7.5
11.0
15.0
5.5
7.5
11.0
15.0
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
24.3
RMS Current (A)
23.7
13.3
18.2
25.1
30.7
14.2
16.2
23.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.0
0.1
15.9
10.1
14.0
18.6
23.9
10.8
12.7
17.5
19.4
10.4
7.5
10.6
13.5
18.4
8.2
9.9
13.0
15.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
2.1
2.7
4.0
4.3
7.3
3.0
4.2
4.6
6.8
1.6
1.2
1.8
1.8
3.4
1.4
2.1
2.0
3.6
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.1
0.8
1.2
1.5
1.8
0.9
1.1
1.5
1.5
0.7
0.7
1.0
1.2
1.8
0.8
1.1
1.3
1.6
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.6
0.3
0.5
0.6
0.8
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.9
0.5
0.3
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.4
0.4
0.6
0.7
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.3
0.2
0.4
0.4
0.7
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.6
0.3
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.5
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.5
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.4
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
30.6
18.6
25.7
34.4
43.9
19.9
23.4
32.2
35.6
0.68
0.4848
0.6858
0.8634
1.1883
0.5286
0.6545
0.8396
1.0236
690+ Series AC Drive
8-25
Technical Specifications
Supply Harmonic Analysis (Frame D Constant)
Assumptions: 10000A short circuit supply capability, equivalent
to 73μH supply impedance at 400V where Q1n is the rated rms
value of the fundamental voltage of the supply transformer. The
results conform to stage 1, stage 2 and stage 3 of the
Engineering Recommendation G.5/3 September 1976,
Classification ‘C’: Limits for Harmonics in the UK Electricity
Industry.
Fundamental
Voltage (V)
Drive Type
Motor Power
(kW)
Typical
Motor
Efficiency %
Harmonic
No.
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Total RMS
Current (A)
THD (V) %
230
THD(V) x 100 =
400
∑ Q h2
%
h = 40
Q 1n
500
Three Phase
11.0
15.0
18.0
15.0
18.0
22.0
30.0
15.0
18.0
22.0
30.0
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
19.4
24.2
29.0
*
RMS Current (A)
37.4
46.7
59.2
25.8
30.6
36.3
51.5
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
20.8
21.1
23.3
18.6
21.6
24.8
34.2
14.9
17.9
20.9
12.7
11.5
11.5
13.1
14.7
16.4
21.8
11.3
13.0
14.7
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
2.5
3.4
4.4
3.7
3.7
3.6
4.2
4.3
4.2
4.2
2.5
2.6
3.0
1.8
2.0
2.4
3.4
2.1
2.0
2.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.4
1.9
2.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
2.2
1.4
1.7
1.8
1.2
1.4
1.7
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.4
1.2
1.2
1.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.9
1.2
1.6
0.7
0.9
1.0
1.3
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.7
0.9
1.2
0.7
0.7
0.8
0.9
0.5
0.7
0.8
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.7
0.9
1.1
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.5
0.7
0.9
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.5
0.6
0.8
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.7
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
44.9
52.8
65.0
34.8
40.5
47.2
65.8
27.5
33.2
39.1
0.90
0.93
1.05
0.85
0.96
1.08
1.44
0.74
0.85
0.96
* Please contact Parker SSD Drives.
690+ Series AC Drive
h= 2
8-26
Technical Specifications
Supply Harmonic Analysis (Frame D Quadratic)
Assumptions: 10000A short circuit supply capability, equivalent
to 73μH supply impedance at 400V where Q1n is the rated rms
value of the fundamental voltage of the supply transformer. The
results conform to stage 1, stage 2 and stage 3 of the
Engineering Recommendation G.5/3 September 1976,
Classification ‘C’: Limits for Harmonics in the UK Electricity
Industry.
Fundamental
Voltage (V)
Drive Type
Motor Power
(kW)
Typical
Motor
Efficiency %
Harmonic
No.
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Total RMS
Current (A)
THD (V) %
230
h= 2
THD(V) x 100 =
400
∑ Q h2
%
h = 40
Q 1n
500
Three Phase
11.0
15.0
90
90
18.0
15.0
18.0
22.0
30.0
15.0
18.0
22.0
30.0
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
*
RMS Current (A)
47.2
59.2
30.6
36.3
48.2
67.7
23.4
29.0
38.6
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.0
22.5
23.3
21.6
24.8
31.0
41.7
17.6
20.9
26.6
12.5
11.5
14.7
16.4
19.6
25.5
13.0
14.7
17.8
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
3.3
4.4
3.7
3.6
3.4
4.0
4.5
4.2
4.1
2.7
3.0
2.0
2.4
3.3
4.7
2.1
2.1
2.6
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.8
2.5
1.7
1.8
1.8
2.1
1.6
1.8
2.0
1.3
1.7
1.1
1.1
1.4
1.9
1.3
1.3
1.2
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.2
1.6
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.3
0.6
0.8
1.1
0.9
1.2
0.7
0.8
0.8
1.1
0.6
0.8
0.8
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.8
1.1
0.5
0.6
0.6
0.9
0.4
0.4
0.6
0.7
0.9
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.4
0.4
0.5
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.6
0.8
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.7
0.3
0.3
0.5
0.5
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.4
0.6
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.4
0.5
0.2
0.2
0.4
0.4
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.3
0.4
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.3
0.4
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
54.0
65.0
40.5
47.2
60.8
83.8
32.6
39.1
50.5
0.97
1.05
0.96
1.08
1.30
1.72
0.85
0.96
1.16
* Please contact Parker SSD Drives.
690+ Series AC Drive
Technical Specifications
8-27
Supply Harmonic Analysis (Frame E Constant)
Assumptions: 10000A short circuit supply capability, equivalent
to 73μH supply impedance at 400V where Q1n is the rated rms
value of the fundamental voltage of the supply transformer. The
results conform to stage 1, stage 2 and stage 3 of the
Engineering Recommendation G.5/3 September 1976,
Classification ‘C’: Limits for Harmonics in the UK Electricity
Industry.
Fundamental
Voltage (V)
Drive Type
Motor Power
(kW)
Typical
Motor
Efficiency %
Harmonic
No.
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Total RMS
Current (A)
THD (V) %
690+ Series AC Drive
230
h= 2
THD(V) x 100 =
400
∑ Q h2
h = 40
Q 1n
500
Three Phase
22.0
30.0
37.0
45.0
30.0
37.0
45.0
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
41.1
52.4
64.4
RMS Current (A)
76.7
52.3
62.8
75.5
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.0
42.4
35.3
42.2
48.4
29.3
36.7
43.1
22.2
22.9
27.2
29.4
20.2
24.8
27.6
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
4.4
4.5
5.2
4.9
5.3
5.9
5.5
4.3
3.2
3.8
4.9
2.7
3.4
4.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
2.0
2.3
2.7
2.5
2.5
2.9
2.9
1.7
1.4
1.6
1.9
1.6
1.8
1.8
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.2
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.1
1.4
1.6
0.9
0.9
1.1
1.0
1.0
1.2
1.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.7
0.7
0.8
0.9
0.6
0.8
0.9
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.7
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.4
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
90.7
67.5
80.8
94.7
54.8
69.1
82.6
1.65
2.58
3.70
3.41
1.31
1.61
1.82
%
8-28
Technical Specifications
Supply Harmonic Analysis (Frame E Quadratic)
Assumptions: 10000A short circuit supply capability,
equivalent to 73μH supply impedance at 400V where Q1n is the
rated rms value of the fundamental voltage of the supply
transformer. The results conform to stage 1, stage 2 and stage
3 of the Engineering Recommendation G.5/3 September 1976,
Classification ‘C’: Limits for Harmonics in the UK Electricity
Industry.
Fundamental
Voltage (V)
Drive Type
Motor Power
(kW)
Typical
Motor
Efficiency %
Harmonic
No.
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Total RMS
Current (A)
THD (V) %
230
h= 2
THD(V) x 100 =
400
∑ Q h2
h = 40
Q 1n
%
500
Three Phase
22.0
30.0
37.0
45.0
30.0
37.0
45.0
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
75.5
RMS Current (A)
102.1
64.3
74.8
89.1
51.5
63.6
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.0
0.0
49.1
41.9
48.7
55.2
35.4
43.1
48.9
21.7
26.0
30.3
32.2
23.3
28.0
30.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
6.3
4.4
5.0
5.1
5.1
5.7
5.4
4.1
4.0
4.6
5.9
3.3
4.1
5.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
2.8
2.3
2.7
2.5
2.6
3.0
2.8
1.7
1.6
1.8
2.3
1.5
1.8
2.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.6
1.4
1.6
1.5
1.4
1.6
1.6
1.0
0.9
1.1
1.2
1.0
1.2
1.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.0
0.8
1.0
1.0
0.7
0.9
1.0
0.7
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.7
0.8
0.7
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.7
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.4
0.6
0.6
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.4
0.6
0.5
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.5
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.4
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.3
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.3
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
115.6
81.3
94.6
110.0
67.1
82.2
95.2
1.84
2.98
3.46
3.84
1.52
1.84
1.02
690+ Series AC Drive
Technical Specifications
8-29
Supply Harmonic Analysis (Frame F Constant)
h= 2
Assumptions: 10000A short circuit supply capability, equivalent to 73μH supply
∑ Q h2
impedance at 400V where Q1n is the rated rms value of the fundamental voltage of
= 40
h
%
THD(V)
x
100
=
the supply transformer. The results conform to stage 1, stage 2 and stage 3 of the
1n
Q
Engineering Recommendation G.5/3 September 1976, Classification ‘C’: Limits
for Harmonics in the UK Electricity Industry.
Fundamental
230
400
500
Voltage (V)
Drive Type
Three Phase
Motor Power
90.0
30.0
37.0
45.0
55.0
75.0
90.0
55.0
75.0
90.0
(150HP)
(kW)
Typical
Motor
Efficiency %
Harmonic
No.
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Total RMS
Current (A)
THD (V) %
690+ Series AC Drive
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
156.6
79.7
104.8
126.7
RMS Current (A)
94.7
118.2
140.1
99.2
132.1
152.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.1
35.9
41.6
45.9
44.9
53.4
57.8
58.9
42.4
49.3
54.5
11.9
11.9
11.8
19.5
19.5
19.1
19.0
22.1
22.5
22.2
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.0
6.5
7.7
8.5
6.9
9.0
10.0
10.3
5.7
7.5
8.9
2.9
3.5
4.2
4.0
4.3
4.6
4.7
4.6
4.6
4.7
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
2.7
3.1
3.2
3.1
3.9
4.2
4.3
2.6
3.3
3.9
1.6
2.1
2.4
1.8
2.2
2.6
2.7
1.8
2.0
2.2
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.7
2.0
2.1
2.1
1.5
1.9
2.1
1.1
1.3
1.4
1.1
1.5
1.7
1.7
1.0
1.2
1.4
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.7
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.1
1.1
1.1
0.9
1.1
1.2
0.7
0.8
0.7
0.8
1.0
1.1
1.1
0.6
0.8
1.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.7
0.7
0.6
0.7
0.7
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.6
0.7
0.7
0.4
0.6
0.7
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.5
0.5
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
102.3
126.2
148.2
110.9
144.3
164.3
168.9
93.3
118.4
140.2
1.33
1.52
1.66
1.71
1.98
2.12
2.15
1.67
1.90
2.06
8-30
Technical Specifications
Supply Harmonic Analysis (Frame F Quadratic)
Assumptions: 10000A short circuit supply capability, equivalent
to 73μH supply impedance at 400V where Q1n is the rated rms
value of the fundamental voltage of the supply transformer. The
results conform to stage 1, stage 2 and stage 3 of the
Engineering Recommendation G.5/3 September 1976,
Classification ‘C’: Limits for Harmonics in the UK Electricity
Industry.
Fundamental
Voltage (V)
Drive Type
Motor Power
(kW)
Typical
Motor
Efficiency %
Harmonic
No.
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Total RMS
Current (A)
THD (V) %
230
h= 2
∑ Q h2
THD(V) x 100 =
400
h = 40
Q
%
1n
500
Three Phase
30.0
37.0
45.0
55.0
75.0
90.0
90.0
(150HP)
55.0
75.0
90.0
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
RMS Current (A)
118.2
140.1
175.5
132.0
151.6
184.4
156.6
104.8
126.7
152.5
0.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.2
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.1
40.9
45.9
52.3
52.6
57.8
64.7
58.9
48.5
54.5
60.5
11.5
11.8
12.3
18.8
19.1
18.6
19.0
21.9
22.2
21.7
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
7.6
8.5
9.5
9.0
10.1
11.5
10.3
7.5
8.9
10.5
3.5
4.2
5.3
4.2
4.6
5.4
4.7
4.5
4.7
4.9
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
3.0
3.2
3.1
3.8
4.2
4.5
4.3
3.3
3.9
4.5
2.1
2.4
2.8
2.3
2.6
3.2
2.7
2.0
2.2
2.6
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.4
1.4
1.4
2.0
2.1
2.0
2.1
1.9
2.1
2.3
1.3
1.4
1.3
1.5
1.7
1.9
1.7
1.2
1.4
1.7
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.7
0.8
1.0
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.3
0.7
0.7
0.8
1.0
1.1
1.1
1.1
0.8
1.0
1.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.8
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
125.9
148.2
183.9
143.8
163.8
196.8
168.9
118.0
140.2
166.0
1.49
1.66
1.87
1.95
2.13
2.34
2.15
1.87
2.06
2.25
690+ Series AC Drive
Certification for the Drive
9-1
CERTIFICATION FOR THE DRIVE
9
Requirements for EMC Compliance
All Variable Speed Drives (VSDs) potentially produce electrical emissions which are radiated
into the environment and conducted back into the ac supply. VSDs are inherently immune to
any additional external electrical noise. The following information is provided to maximise the
Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) of VSDs and systems in their intended operating
environment, by minimising their emissions and maximising their immunity.
Minimising Radiated Emissions
EN50081-1 (1992)/EN50081-2 (1994)/EN55011/EN55022 radiated emission measurements are
made between 30MHz and 1GHz in the far field at a distance of 10 to 30 metres. Limits lower
than 30MHz or in close proximity are not specified. Emissions from individual components tend
to be additive.
•
Use a screened/armoured cable between VSD/cubicle and motor containing the motor
protective earth (PE) connection. It should have a 360° screen termination. Earth screen at
both ends connecting to the motor frame and cubicle (or gland box if wall mounted).
Maintain the screen integrity using 360° terminations.
Note: Some hazardous area installations may preclude direct earthing at both ends of the
screen, in this case earth one end via a 1μF 50Vac capacitor, and the other as normal.
•
Keep unshielded cable as short as possible inside the cubicle.
•
Always maintain the integrity of the shield.
•
If the cable is interrupted to insert contactors etc., re-connect the screen using the shortest
possible route.
•
Keep the length of screen stripped-back as short as possible when making screen
connections.
•
Ideally use 360° screen terminations using cable glands or ‘U’ clips on power screen rails.
If a shielded cable is not available, lay unshielded motor cables in a metal conduit which will act
as a shield. The conduit must be continuous with a direct electrical contact to the VSD and
motor housing. If links are necessary, use braid with a minimum cross sectional area of 10mm2.
Note: Some motor gland boxes and conduit glands are made of plastic, if this is the case, then
braid must be connected between the screen and the chassis. In addition at the motor
end, ensure that the screen is electrically connected to the motor frame since some
terminal boxes are insulated from the frame by gasket/paint.
Earthing Requirements
IMPORTANT: Protective earthing always takes precedence over EMC earthing.
Protective Earth (PE) Connections
Note: In accordance with installations to EN60204, only one protective earth conductor is
permitted at each protective earth terminal contacting point.
Local wiring regulations may require the protective earth connection of the motor to be
connected locally, i.e. not as specified in these instructions. This will not cause shielding
problems because of the relatively high RF impedance of the local earth connection.
EMC Earth Connections
For compliance with EMC requirements, we recommend that the “0V/signal ground” is
separately earthed. When a number of units are used in a system, these terminals should be
connected together at a single, local earthing point.
690+ Series AC Drive
9-2
Certification for the Drive
Control and signal cables for the encoder, all analog inputs, and communications require
screening with the screen connected only at the VSD end. However, if high frequency noise is
still a problem, earth screen at the non VSD end via a 0.1μF capacitor.
Note: Connect the screen (at the VSD end) to the VSD protective earth point, and not to the
control board terminals.
Cabling Requirements
Note: Refer to Chapter 8: “Technical Specifications” for additional Cabling Requirements.
Planning Cable Runs
•
Use the shortest possible motor cable lengths.
•
Use a single length of cable to a star junction point to feed multiple motors.
•
Keep electrically noisy and sensitive cables apart.
•
Keep electrically noisy and sensitive parallel cable runs to a minimum. Separate parallel
cable runs by at least 0.25 metres. For runs longer than 10 metres, separation should be
increased proportionally. For example if the parallel runs were 50m, then the separation
would be (50/10) x 0.25m = 1.25m.
•
Sensitive cables should cross noisy cables at 90°.
•
Never run sensitive cables close or parallel to the motor, dc link and braking chopper circuit
for any distance.
•
Never run supply, dc link or motor cables in the same bundle as the signal/control and
feedback cables, even if they are screened.
•
Ensure EMC filter input and output cables are separately routed and do not couple across
the filter.
Increasing Motor Cable Length
Because cable capacitance and hence conducted emissions increase with motor cable length,
conformance to EMC limits is only guaranteed with the specified ac supply filter option using a
maximum cable length as specified in Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications”.
This maximum cable length can be improved using the specified external input or output filters.
Refer to Chapter 8: “Technical Specifications” - External AC Supply (RFI) Filters.
Screened/armoured cable has significant capacitance between the conductors and screen which
increases linearly with cable length (typically 200pF/m but varies with cable type and current
rating).
Long cable lengths may have the following undesirable effects:
•
Tripping on `overcurrent’ as the cable capacitance is charged and discharged at the
switching frequency.
•
Producing increased conducted emissions which degrade the performance of the EMC filter
due to saturation.
•
Causing RCDs (Residual Current Devices) to trip due to increased high frequency earth
current.
•
Producing increased heating inside the EMC ac supply filter from the increased conducted
emissions.
These effects can be overcome by adding chokes or output filters at the output of the VSD.
690+ Series AC Drive
Certification for the Drive
9-3
EMC Installation Options
The unit, when installed for Class A or Class B operation, will be compliant with EN55011
(1991)/ EN55022 (1994) for radiated emissions, as described below.
Screening & Earthing (wall mounted, Class A)
IMPORTANT: This unit must be fitted with the optional top cover.
The unit is installed for Class A operation when wall mounted using the recommended ac
supply filter and having complied with all cabling requirements.
Note: The installation requirements of local safety standards must be achieved regarding the
safety of electrical equipment for machines.
•
A single-star point earthing policy as shown in Figure 9-2 is required.
•
The protective earth connection (PE) to the motor must be run inside the screened cable
between the motor and VSD and be connected to the protective earth terminal in the gland
box, or on the VSD.
•
The internal/external ac supply filter must be permanently earthed. Refer to Chapter 8:
“Technical Specifications” - Earthing/Safety Details.
•
The signal/control cables should be screened.
Note: Refer to Chapter 8: “Technical Specifications” for details on Cabling Requirements.
Screening & Earthing (cubicle mounted, Class B)
Note: The installation requirements of local safety standards must be achieved regarding the
safety of electrical equipment for machines.. Refer to Chapter 3: “Installing the Drive” Protective Earth (PE) Connections
.
The unit is installed for Class B operation when mounted inside a cubicle having 10dB
attenuation between 30 and 100MHz (typically the attenuation provided by a metal cabinet with
no aperture of dimension greater than 0.15m), using the recommended ac supply filter and
having met all cabling requirements.
Note: Radiated magnetic and electric fields inside the cubicle will be high and any components
fitted inside must be sufficiently immune.
The VSD, external filter and associated equipment are mounted onto a conducting, metal
mounting panel. Do not use cubicle constructions that use insulating mounting panels or
undefined mounting structures. Cables between the VSD and motor must be screened or
armoured and terminated at the VSD or locally on the back panel.
690+ Series AC Drive
9-4
Certification for the Drive
Single VSD Single Motor
Cubicle
Back Panel
Apply a single point
series earthing
strategy for a single
VSD mounted in a
cubicle as shown.
The protective earth
connection (PE) to
the motor must be
run inside the
screened cable
between the motor
and VSD and be
connected to the
motor protective
earth terminal on the
VSD.
VSD
External
Filter
U-clip used to
terminate screen
connection to
the back panel
PE2 PE1
Motor
AC Supply
As short as possible
(0.3 metres maximum)
Armoured/screened cable
Additional PE connectors for
where PE1 is <10mm 2 cross-section
Figure 9-1 EMC and Safety Earthing Cabling
Single VSD - Multiple Motors
Note: Refer to Chapter 10: “Application Notes” - Using Multiple Motors on a Single Drive.
If connecting multiple motors to a single VSD, use a star junction point for motor cable
connections. Use a metal box with entry and exit cable glands to maintain shield integrity.
Refer to Chapter 10: Application Notes” - Using Multiple Motors on a Single Drive.
Star Point Earthing
A star-point earthing policy separates ‘noisy’ and ‘clean’ earths. Four separate earth busbars
(three are insulated from the mounting panel) connect to a single earth point (star point) near the
incoming safety earth from the main supply. Flexible, large cross-section cable is used to ensure
a low HF impedance. Busbars are arranged so that connection to the single earth point is as
short as possible.
1 Clean Earth Busbar (insulated from the mounting panel)
Used as a reference point for all signal and control cabling. This may be further subdivided into
an analog and a digital reference busbar, each separately connected to the star earthing point.
The digital reference is also used for any 24V control.
Note: The 690+ uses a single clean earth busbar for analog and digital.
2 Dirty Earth Busbar (insulated from the mounting panel)
Used for all power earths, i.e. protective earth connection. It is also used as a reference for any
110 or 220V control used, and for the control transformer screen.
3 Metal Work Earth Busbar
The back panel is used as this earth busbar, and should provide earthing points for all parts of
the cubicle including panels and doors. This busbar is also used for power screened cables
which terminate near to (10cm) or directly into a VSD - such as motor cables, braking choppers
and their resistors, or between VSDs - refer to the appropriate product manual to identify these.
Use U-clips to clamp the screened cables to the back panel to ensure optimum HF connection.
4 Signal/Control Screen Earth Busbar (insulated from the mounting panel)
Used for signal/control screened cables which do not go directly to the VSD. Place this busbar
as close as possible to the point of cable entry. ‘U’ clamp the screened cables to the busbars to
ensure an optimum HF connection.
690+ Series AC Drive
Certification for the Drive
to motor
to motor
screened
9-5
U-clip used to terminate screen
connection to the back panel
to motor
screened
Back Panel
f
VSD
f
0A
f
PE
PE
PE
VSD
0D PE
f
VSD
PLC
Metal Work Earth
PE
0A
0D PE
0A
0D
PE
0D
Doors
Back
Panel
Metal
Work
24V Control
Analogue Clean Earth
Digital Clean Earth
unscreened signals
Dirty Earth
Signal/Control Screen
110V
0A = 0 Volts Analogue
Control
0D = 0 Volts Digital
PE = Protective Earth
f = External Filter
VSD = Variable Speed Drive
PLC = Programmable Logic Controller
STAR POINT
all screened signals not
going directly to a VSD
Incoming Safety Earth (PE)
Figure 9-2 Star Point Earthing
Sensitive Equipment
The proximity of the source and victim circuit has a large effect on radiated coupling. The
electromagnetic fields produced by VSDs falls off rapidly with distance from the
cabling/cubicle. Remember that the radiated fields from EMC compliant drive systems are
measured at least 10m from the equipment, over the band 30-1000MHz. Any equipment placed
closer than this will see larger magnitude fields, especially when very close to the drive.
Do not place magnetic/electric field sensitive equipment within 0.25 metres of the following
parts of the VSD system:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Variable Speed Drive (VSD)
EMC output filters
Input or output chokes/transformers
The cable between VSD and motor (even when screened/armoured)
Connections to external braking chopper and resistor (even when screened/armoured)
AC/DC brushed motors (due to commutation)
DC link connections (even when screened/armoured)
Relays and contactors (even when suppressed)
From experience, the following equipment is particularly sensitive and requires careful
installation.
• Any transducers which produce low level analog outputs (<1V) , e.g. load cells, strain
gauges, thermocouples, piezoelectric transducers, anemometers, LVDTs
• Wide band width control inputs (>100Hz)
• AM radios (long and medium wave only)
• Video cameras and closed circuit TV
• Office personal computers
• Capacitive devices such as proximity sensors and level transducers
• Mains borne communication systems
• Equipment not suitable for operation in the intended EMC environment, i.e. with
insufficient immunity to new EMC standards
690+ Series AC Drive
9-6
Certification for the Drive
Requirements for UL Compliance
Solid-State Motor Overload Protection
These devices provide Class 10 motor overload protection. The maximum internal overload
protection level (current limit) is 150% for 60 seconds in Constant mode, and 110% for 60s in
Quadratic mode. Refer to the Software Product Manual, Chapter 1: Programming Your
Application - CURRENT LIMIT for user current limit adjustment information.
An external motor overload protective device must be provided by the installer where the motor
has a full-load ampere rating of less than 50% of the drive output rating; or when the MOTOR
STALLED trip is TRUE (TRIPS STATUS::DISABLE TRIPS>> MOTOR STALLED); or
when the STALL TIME parameter is increased above 480 seconds (refer to the 690+ Software
Manual, Chapter 1 : STALL TRIP).
Short Circuit Rating
The following drives are suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than:
Frame B:
Frame C:
Frame D:
Frame E:
Frame F:
10,000 RMS Symmetrical Amperes, 230/460/500V maximum (as appropriate)
10,000 RMS Symmetrical Amperes, 230/460/500V maximum (as appropriate)
10,000 RMS Symmetrical Amperes, 230/460/500V maximum (as appropriate)
18,000 RMS Symmetrical Amperes, 230/460/500V maximum (as appropriate)
18,000 RMS Symmetrical Amperes, 230/460/500V maximum (as appropriate)
Solid-State Short-Circuit Protection
These devices are provided with Solid-State Short-Circuit (output) Protection. Integral solid
state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection. Branch circuit protection
requirements must be in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code
NEC/NFPA-70 and any additional local codes.
Recommended Branch Circuit Protection
It is recommended that UL Listed (JDDZ) non-renewable cartridge fuses, Class K5 or H; or UL
Listed (JDRX) renewable cartridge fuses, Class H, are installed upstream of the drive. Refer to
Chapter 8: “Technical Specifications” - Power Details for recommended fuse ratings.
Motor Base Frequency
The motor base frequency rating is 480Hz maximum.
Field Wiring Temperature Rating
Use 75°C Copper conductors only.
Field Wiring Terminal Markings
For correct field wiring connections that are to be made to each terminal refer to Chapter 3:
“Installing the Drive” - Power Wiring Connections, and Control Wiring Connections.
Terminal Tightening Torques
Refer to Chapter 3: "Installing the Drive" - Terminal Tightening Torques.
690+ Series AC Drive
Certification for the Drive
9-7
Recommended Wire Sizes
North American wire sizes (AWG) are based on NEC/NFPA-70 for ampacities of
thermoplastic-insulated (75ºC) copper conductors assuming not more than three current-carrying
conductors in raceway or cable, based on ambient temperature of 30ºC.
The wire sizes allow for an ampacity of 125% of the rated input and output amperes for motor
branch-circuit conductors as specified in NEC/NFPA-70.
FRAME B
Terminal acceptance range: 18-10 AWG
Model Catalog Code
for North America
Power Input
Power Output
AWG
AWG
230V Build Variant: 220-240V ±10%
CONSTANT
690+/0001/230/../1
14
14
690+/0002/230/../1
10
14
690+/0003/230/../1
10
14
690+/0001/230/..
14
14
690+/0002/230/..
14
14
690+/0003/230/..
12
14
690+/0005/230/..
10
10
400V Build Variant: 460V ±10%
CONSTANT
690+/0001/460/..
14
14
690+/0002/460/..
14
14
690+/0003/460/..
14
14
690+/0005/460/..
14
14
690+/0007/460/..
12
14
690+/0010/460/..
10
12
Brake Output
AWG
14
14
14
14
14
14
10
14
14
14
14
12
10
FRAME C
Terminal acceptance range: 18-6 AWG
Model Catalog Code
for North America
690+/0007/230/..
690+/0010/230/..
690+/0007/230/..
690+/0015/230/..
690+/0007/460/..
690+/0010/460/..
690+/0015/460/..
690+/0020/460/..
690+/0007/460/..
690+/0010/460/..
690+/0015/460/..
690+/0020/460/..
690+ Series AC Drive
Power Input
Power Output
AWG
AWG
230V Build Variant: 220-240V ±10%
CONSTANT
8
10
8
8
QUADRATIC
8
8
6
6
400V Build Variant: 460V ±10%
CONSTANT
12
14
12
12
10
10
8
8
QUADRATIC
12
12
10
10
8
8
8
8
Brake Output
AWG
12
12
14
14
12
12
12
12
14
12
12
12
9-8
Certification for the Drive
FRAME D
Terminal acceptance range: 14-4 AWG
Model Catalog Code
for North America
690+/0015/230/..
690+/0020/230/..
690+/0025/230/..
690+/0015/230/..
690+/0020/230/..
Power Input
Power Output
AWG
AWG
230V Build Variant: 220-240V ±10%
CONSTANT
6
6
690+/0020/460/..
690+/0025/460/..
690+/0030/460/..
690+/0040/460/..
10
4
4
10
4
4
10
QUADRATIC
4
4
10
4
4
10
400V Build Variant: 460V ±10%
CONSTANT
8
8
690+/0020/460/..
690+/0025/460/..
690+/0030/460/..
690+/0040/460/..
Brake Output
AWG
10
8
8
10
8
6
10
4
6
10
QUADRATIC
8
8
10
8
6
10
6
6
10
4
4
10
FRAME E
Terminal acceptance range: 6-1/0 AWG
Model Catalog Code
for North America
690+/0030/230/..
690+/0030/230/..
690+/0040/460/..
690+/0050/460/..
690+/0060/460/..
690+/0040/460/..
690+/0050/460/..
690+/0060/460/..
Power Input
Power Output
AWG
AWG
230V Build Variant: 220-240V ±10%
CONSTANT
2
3
QUADRATIC
1/0
1
400V Build Variant: 460V ±10%
CONSTANT
4
4
Brake Output
AWG
8
8
8
4
3
8
3
2
8
QUADRATIC
4
3
8
3
2
8
1
1
8
690+ Series AC Drive
Certification for the Drive
9-9
FRAME F
Terminal acceptance range: 2AWG-250kcmil
Model Catalog Code
for North America
690+/0040/230/..
690+/0050/230/..
690+/0060/230/..
Power Input
Power Output
AWG
AWG
230V Build Variant: 220-240V ±10%
CONSTANT
1
1
690+/0040/230/..
690+/0050/230/..
690+/0060/230/..
690+0075/460/..
Brake Output
AWG
8
2/0
2/0
8
3/0
3/0
8
QUADRATIC
2/0
2/0
8
3/0
3/0
8
4/0
250kcmil
8
400V Build Variant: 460V ±10%
CONSTANT
1
1
8
690+0100/460/..
2/0
2/0
8
690+0125/460/..
3/0
3/0
8
690+0150/460/..
4/0
4/0
8
690+0075/460/..
QUADRATIC
2/0
2/0
8
690+0100/460/..
3/0
3/0
8
690+0125/460/..
4/0
4/0
8
690+0150/460/..
4/0
4/0
8
Field Grounding Terminals
The field grounding terminals are identified with the International Grounding Symbol
(IEC Publication 417, Symbol 5019).
Operating Ambient Temperature
Constant Duty
Quadratic Duty
Open Type
Cubicle Mounted
45°C
UL Type 1 Enclosed
Wall Mounted with top cover
40°C
Open Type
Cubicle Mounted
40°C
UL Type 1 Enclosed
Wall Mounted with top cover
35°C
Direct Wall-Mountable Models
All models of this drive with a Product Code Block 6 (Frame B) or Block 4 (Frames C, D, E)
designation xx2x are suitable for direct wall mounting applications as they have a “Type 1
Enclosure” rating.
In order to preserve this enclosure rating, it is important to maintain the environmental integrity
of the enclosure. Therefore, the installer must provide correct Type 1 closures for all unused
clearance holes provided within the drive’s glandplate.
Type 1 Enclosed models are suitable for use in no worse than a Pollution Degree 2 environment.
690+ Series AC Drive
9-10
Certification for the Drive
Input Fuse Ratings (North America)
Catalog Number
Input Fuse Rating (A)
Constant
Catalog Number
Input Fuse Rating (A)
Quadratic
Constant
Quadratic
230V BUILD VARIANT 220-240V ±10%, 45-65Hz *
Frame B
Frame C
690+/0001/230../1
15
-
690+/0007/230..
30
35
690+/0002/230../1
25
-
690+/0010/230..
35
50
690+/0003/230../1
30
-
690+/0001/230..
10
-
690+/0002/230..
15
-
690+/0003/230..
15
-
25
100
125
690+/0005/230..
Frame D
Frame E
690+/0015/230..
50
60
690+/0020/230..
60
70
690+/0025/230..
70
-
690+/0040/230..
110
150
690+/0050/230..
150
150
150
200
690+/0030/230..
Frame F
690+/0060/230..
400V BUILD VARIANT 380-460V ±10%, 45-65Hz *
Frame B
Frame C
690+0001/460/..
6
-
690+/0007/460/..
15
20
690+0002/460/..
10
-
690+/0010/460/..
20
25
690+0003/460/..
10
-
690+/0015/460/..
25
30
690+0005/460/..
15
-
690+/0020/460/..
35
40
690+0007/460/..
20
-
25
-
690+0010/460/..
Frame D
Frame E
690+/0020/460/..
30
40
690+/0040/460/..
60
70
690+/0025/460/..
40
45
690+/0050/460/..
70
90
690+/0030/460/..
45
60
690+/0060/460/..
90
100
690+/0040/460/..
60
70
690+/0075/460/..
110
125
690+/0100/460/..
125
150
690+/0125/460/..
150
175
690+/0150/460/..
175
175
Frame F
* Note : Frame B only is 50Hz ±5% or 60Hz ±5%
690+ Series AC Drive
Certification for the Drive
9-11
European Directives and the CE Mark
The following information is supplied to provide a basic understanding of the EMC and low
voltage directives CE marking requirements. The following literature is recommended for
further information:
•
Recommendations for Application of Power Drive Systems (PDS), European Council
Directives - CE Marking and Technical Standardisation - (CEMEP)
Available from your local trade association or Parker SSD Drives office
•
EMC Installation Guidelines for Modules and Systems - (SSD Drives)
Available from your local Parker SSD Drives office, part number HA388879
The European machines and drives manufacturers via their national trade associations have
formed the European Committee of Manufacturers of Electrical Machines and Power
Electronics (CEMEP). Parker SSD Drives and other major European drives manufacturers are
working to the CEMEP recommendations on CE marking. The CE mark shows that a product
complies with the relevant EU directives, in our case the Low Voltage Directive and, in some
instances, the EMC Directive.
CE Marking for Low Voltage Directive
When installed in accordance with this manual, the 690+ AC Drive is CE marked by Parker
SSD Drives in accordance with the low voltage directive (S.I. No. 3260 implements this LVD
directive into UK law). An EC Declaration of Conformity (low voltage directive) is included at
the end of this chapter.
CE Marking for EMC - Who is Responsible?
Note: The specified EMC emission and immunity performance of this unit can only be achieved
when the unit is installed to the EMC Installation Instructions given in this manual.
According to S.I. No. 2373 which implements the EMC directive into UK law, the requirement
for CE marking this unit falls into two categories:
1.
Where the supplied unit has an intrinsic/direct function to the end user, then the unit is
classed as relevant apparatus.
2.
Where the supplied unit is incorporated into a higher system/apparatus or machine which
includes (at least) the motor, cable and a driven load but is unable to function without this
unit, then the unit is classed as a component.
Q Relevant Apparatus - Parker SSD Drives Responsibility
Occasionally, say in a case where an existing fixed speed motor - such as a fan or pump - is
converted to variable speed with an add-on drive module (relevant apparatus), it becomes the
responsibility of Parker SSD Drives to apply the CE mark and issue an EC Declaration of
Conformity for the EMC Directive. This declaration and the CE mark is included at the end of
this chapter.
Q Component - Customer Responsibility
The majority of Parker SSD Drives’ products are classed as components and therefore we
cannot apply the CE mark or produce an EC Declaration of Conformity in respect of EMC. It is
therefore the manufacturer/supplier/installer of the higher system/apparatus or machine who
must conform to the EMC directive and CE mark.
690+ Series AC Drive
9-12
Certification for the Drive
Legal Requirements for CE Marking
IMPORTANT: Before installation, clearly understand who is responsible for conformance with the EMC
directive. Misappropriation of the CE mark is a criminal offence.
It is important that you have now defined who is responsible for conforming to the EMC
directive, either:
Q Parker SSD Drives Responsibility
You intend to use the unit as relevant apparatus.
When the specified EMC filter is correctly fitted to the unit following EMC installation
instructions, it complies with the relevant standards indicated in the following tables. The fitting
of the filter is mandatory for the CE marking of this unit to apply.
The relevant declarations are to be found at the end of this chapter. The CE mark is displayed on
the EC Declaration of Conformity (EMC Directive) provided at the end of this chapter.
Q Customer Responsibility
You intend to use the unit as a component, therefore you have a choice:
1.
To fit the specified filter following EMC installation instructions, which may help you gain
EMC compliance for the final machine/system.
2.
Not to fit the specified filter, but use a combination of global or local filtering and screening
methods, natural migration through distance, or the use of distributed parasitic elements of
the existing installation.
Note: When two or more EMC compliant components are combined to form the final
machine/system, the resulting machine/system may no longer be compliant, (emissions
tend to be additive, immunity is determined by the least immune component). Understand
the EMC environment and applicable standards to keep additional compliance costs to a
minimum.
Applying for CE Marking for EMC
We have supplied a Manufacturer’s EMC Declaration at the end of this chapter that you can use
as a basis for your own justification of overall compliance with the EMC directive. There are
three methods of demonstrating conformity:
1.
Self-certification to a relevant standard
2.
Third party testing to a relevant standard
3.
Writing a technical construction file stating the technical rationale as to why your final
machine/system is compliant. An EMC “competent body” must then assess this and issue a
technical report or certificate to demonstrate compliance.
Refer to Article 10(2) of Directive 89/336/EEC.
With EMC compliance, an EC Declaration of Conformity and the CE mark will be issued for
your final machine/system.
IMPORTANT: Professional end users with EMC expertise who are using drive modules and cubicle
systems defined as components who supply, place on the market or install the relevant
apparatus must take responsibility for demonstrating EMC conformance and applying
the CE mark and issuing an EC Declaration of Conformity.
Which Standards Apply?
Power Drive Product Specific
The standards that may apply to this unit come under two broad categories:
1.
Emission - these standards limit the interference caused by operating (this) drive module.
2.
Immunity - these standards limit the effect of interference (on this unit) from other electrical
and electronic apparatus.
Conformance can be demonstrated using the Product Specific Standard.
690+ Series AC Drive
Certification for the Drive
9-13
STAR T
IS SSD MODULE
RELEVANT APPARATUS
WIT H INT RINSIC FUNCTION
TO END USER (CEMEP
VALIDIT Y FIELD 1)
NO
CEMEP VALIDIT Y FIELDS
2, 3 AND 4
YES
OPTIONAL SSD FILTERS
AVAILABLE T O ASSIST USERS
IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE
EMC DIRECT IVE
WILL T HE SSD PRODUCT
BE INST ALLED
ACCORDING T O T HE
INST ALLAT ION
GUIDELINES
NO
EMC CHARACT ERIST ICS
STAT ED IN MANUAL
YES
FIT THE SPECIFIED
SSD EMC FILT ER
T HE SSD EC DECLARAT ION OF
CONFORMIT Y FOR EMC IS VALID
FOR T HE SPECIFIED ED MODULE
EMC INSTALLAT ION GUIDELINES
STAT ED IN MANUAL
T HE ED MANUFACTURERS DECLARAT ION
FOR EMC IS VALID FOR T HE SPECIFIED
MODULE WHEN INSTALLED CORRECTLY
A GLOBAL EMC SOLUTION
MAY BE ADVANTAGEOUS
EMC 'CE' MARK CAN BE APPLIED TO SSD
MODULE TO GENERIC EMC STANDARDS:
NO EMC 'CE' MARK APPLIED TO SSD MODULE.
EN61800-3 (1997)
SSD = SSD DRIVES LIMIT ED
CEMEP : Refer to Chapter 12, "European Directives and the CE Mark"
RELEVANT APPARATUS
MANUFACT URER/SUPPLIER/INST ALLERS
RESPONSIBILITY T O CONFORM WIT H EMC DIRECTIVE.
SSD EMC CHARACTERIST ICS AND MANUFACT URERS
DECLARATION MAY BE USED AS A BASIS
IN T HE OVERALL PRODUCT JUST IFICAT ION
Figure 9-3 SSD EMC `CE' Mark Validity Chart
690+ Series AC Drive
9-14
Certification for the Drive
Certificates
690P
EC DECLARATIONS OF CONFORMITY
Date CE marked first applied: 01.04.2000
Issued for
compliance
with the EMC
Directive when
the unit is used
as relevant
apparatus.
EMC Directive
Low Voltage Directive
The drive is CE
marked
in
In accordance with the EEC Directive
In accordance with the EEC Directive
accordance with
2004/108/EC
2006/95/EC
the low voltage
We Parker SSD Drives, address as below,
We Parker SSD Drives, address as below,
directive for
declare under our sole responsibility that the
declare under our sole responsibility that the electrical
above Electronic Products when installed and
above Electronic Products when installed and equipment and
operated with reference to the instructions in
operated with reference to the instructions in appliances in the
the Product Manual (provided with each piece
the Product Manual
voltage range
of equipment) is in accordance with the relevant (provided with each piece of equipment), is in
when installed
clauses from the following standard:accordance with the relevant clauses from the
correctly.
following standard :* BSEN61800-3 (2004)
EN50178 (1998)
MANUFACTURERS DECLARATIONS
EMC Declaration
This is
provided to aid
We Parker SSD Drives, address as below,
your
declare under our sole responsibility that the
justification for above Electronic Products when installed and
operated with reference to the instructions in
EMC
the Product Manual (provided with each piece
compliance
of equipment) is in accordance with the
when the unit
relevant clauses from the following standard:is used as a
component.
* BSEN61800-3 (2004)
Machinery Directive
Since the
potential hazards
The above Electronic Products
are mainly
are components to be incorporated into
machinery and may not be operated alone.
electrical rather
The complete machinery or installation using than mechanical,
this equipment may only be put into service the drive does not
when the safety considerations of the Directive fall under the
89/392/EEC are fully adhered to.
machinery
Particular reference should be made to
EN60204-1 (Safety of Machinery - Electrical directive.
However, we do
Equipment of Machines).
supply a
All instructions, warnings and safety
information of the Product Manual must be manufacturer's
adhered to.
declaration for
when the drive is
used (as a
component) in
machinery.
Dr Martin Payn (Conformance Officer)
* Compliant with the immunity requirements of the Standard without specified EMC filters.
* 690PB only when fitted with an internal or external filter.
PARKER SSD DRIVES
NEW COURTWICK LANE, LITTLEHAMPTON, WEST SUSSEX BN17 7RZ
TELEPHONE: +44(0)1903 737000 FAX: +44(0)1903 737100
Registered Number: 4806503 England. Registered Office: 55 Maylands Avenue, Hemel Hempstead, Herts HP2 4SJ
690+ Series AC Drive
Application Notes
10-1
APPLICATION NOTES
0
1
Application advice is available through our Technical Support Department, who can also
arrange for on-site assistance if required. Refer to the back cover of this manual for the address
of your local Parker SSD Drives company.
•
Always use gold flash relays, or others designed for low current operation (5mA), on all
control wiring.
•
Remove all power factor correction equipment from the motor side of the drive before use.
•
Avoid using motors with low efficiency and small cos ø (power factor) as they require a
larger kVA rated drive to produce the correct shaft kW.
Synchronous Motor Control
Although intended primarily for use with induction (asynchronous) motors, drives can also be
used for speed control of synchronous motors. Synchronous motors can offer economic
solutions in applications where tight control of speed is required together with the low
maintenance characteristics of an ac motor.
The two most common types of synchronous ac motor are permanent magnet and wound rotor.
In contrast to induction motors, synchronous motors run at synchronous speed whether on full
load or no load. Synchronous speed is set by the frequency of the supply applied to the stator.
The stator flux can be kept constant by keeping the stator volts/frequency ratio constant, as with
an induction motor.
Torque is produced in the motor by an increase in load angle between the stator and rotor fluxes.
Maximum torque occurs when the load angle approaches 90°. If the load angle exceeds this
value then torque drops and the motor will stall. Systems involving synchronous motors need
careful design to ensure that the motor can accelerate the load and handle transient load changes
without stalling.
Brake Motors
Brake motors are used in applications requiring a mechanical brake for safety or other
operational reasons. The motor can be a standard induction motor fitted with an electromechanical brake, or it could be a special conical rotor machine. In the case of a conical rotor
machine the spring-loaded brake is controlled by the motor terminal voltage as follows:
•
At rest the motor is braked.
•
When the motor is energised an axial component of the magnetic field due to the conical
air-gap overcomes the force of the brake spring and draws the rotor into the stator. This
axial displacement releases the brake and allows the motor to accelerate like a normal
induction motor.
•
When the motor is de-energised the magnetic field collapses and the brake spring displaces
the rotor, pushing the brake disc against the braking surface.
Drives can be used to control the speed of conical rotor brake motors since the linear V/F
characteristic maintains the motor magnetic field constant over the speed range. It will be
necessary to set the FIXED BOOST parameter to overcome motor losses at low speed (see
FLUXING menu at level 3).
Using Line Chokes
Line chokes are not required to limit input current to Parker SSD Drives Inverters. Controllers
from 5.5kW ( 400v) or 2.2kW ( 230v) upwards are fitted with DC link chokes to limit the ripple
current seen by the DC link capacitors and thus prolong their life.
690+ Series AC Drive
10-2
Application Notes
Line chokes may be used to reduce the harmonic content of the supply current where this a
particular requirement of the application or where greater protection from mains borne transients
is required.
Using Output Contactors
The use of output contactors is permitted. It is recommended that this type of operation be
limited to emergency use only or in a system where the drive can be inhibited before closing or
opening this contactor.
Using Motor Chokes
Installations with motor cable runs in excess of 50m may suffer from nuisance overcurrent trips.
This is due to the capacitance of the cable causing current spikes to be drawn from the drive
output. A choke may be fitted in the drive output which limits the capacitive current. Screened
cable has a higher capacitance and may cause problems in shorter runs. The recommended
choke values are shown in Table 13.1.
Motor
Power
Choke Inductance
RMS Current Rating
Parker SSD Part No.
2mH
7.5A
CO055931
0.9mH
22A
CO057283
0.45mH
33A
CO057284
18
0.3mH
44A
CO057285
22
50μH
70A
CO055193
37
50μH
99A
CO055253
45
50μH
99A
CO055253
55
50μH
243A
CO057960
75
50μH
360A
CO387886
90
50μH
360A
CO387886
110
50μH
360A
CO387886
(kW)
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
11
15
30
Table 10-1 Recommended Choke Values for Cables up to 300 Metres
690+ Series AC Drive
Application Notes
10-3
Using Multiple Motors on a Single Drive
A single large drive can be used to supply several smaller motors provided that each individual
motor has overload protection.
Note: Conventional V/F control strategy must be
enabled for use with parallel motors. (Sensorless
vector control strategy cannot be used). See the
VECTOR ENABLE parameter under VECTOR SETUP menu at level 2.
VSD
M1/U M2/V M3/W
The drive must be rated to supply the total motor
current. It is not sufficient to simply sum the power
ratings of the motors, since the drive has also to
supply the magnetising current for each motor.
Note that the overload device will not prevent the
motor overheating due to inadequate cooling at low
speed. Force vented motors may be required; consult
your motor supplier.
OL1
M1
OL2
M2
WARNING!
All motors should be connected to the drive
output before the START command is given.
Figure 10-1 Single Drives supplying
multiple Motors
Caution
Restrict the total cable length on multiple motor installations as follows:
50 metres with no output choke fitted,
300 metres with choke.
Dynamic Braking
During deceleration, or with
an overhauling load, the
motor acts as a generator.
EXTERNAL
RESISTOR
Energy flows back from the
NETWORK
motor into the dc link
+
capacitors within the drive.
This causes the dc link
GATE
voltage to rise. If the dc link
DRIVE
voltage exceeds 810V for
CIRCUIT
the 400V build (or 890V for
the 500V build) then the
drive will trip to protect the
capacitors and the drive
power devices. The amount
of energy that can be
absorbed in the capacitors is
Figure 10-2 Dynamic Braking Circuit
relatively small; typically
more than 20% braking
torque will cause the drive to trip on overvoltage. Dynamic braking increases the braking
capability of the drive by dissipating the excess energy in a high power resistor connected
across the dc link, see above. Refer to the Power Wiring Connection Diagrams in Chapter 3.
690+ Series AC Drive
10-4
Application Notes
The Dynamic Braking Option is a PCB with an extra IGBT power device fitted. It is fitted
inside the drive package and is connected to the negative side of the dc link.
When the dc link voltage rises above that specified for each Frame size (Chapter 8: “Technical
Specifications” - Internal Dynamic Brake Switch) the brake unit switches the external resistor
network across the dc link. The brake unit switches off again when the dc link voltage falls
below the threshold level. The amount of energy produced by the motor during regeneration
depends upon the DECEL TIME parameter (refer to the REFERENCE RAMP and DYNAMIC
BRAKING function blocks) and the inertia of the load.
Refer to Chapter 3: “Installing the Drive” - External Brake Resistor for brake resistor selection
information.
High Starting Torque
Applications requiring high motor starting torque (greater than 100% of rated torque) need
careful setup of the drive voltage boost feature. For most motors, a FIXED BOOST parameter
(FLUXING function block) setting of 6.0% is usually adequate. Setting the FIXED BOOST
parameter level too high can cause the drive current limit feature to operate. If this occurs, the
drive will be unable to ramp up in frequency. The IT LIMITING diagnostic (INVERSE TIME
function block) will indicate TRUE when the inverse time current limit feature is operating.
Simply reducing the level of the FIXED BOOST parameter will remove this problem. It is
important to use the minimum level of FIXED BOOST necessary to accelerate the load. Using a
level of FIXED BOOST higher than necessary will lead to increased motor heating and
increased risk of drive overload.
Note: Motor torques greater than 100% require high currents to be drawn from the drive. Thus,
the CURRENT LIMIT parameter (CURRENT LIMIT function block) will have to be set
accordingly such that the drive current limit feature will not activate when accelerating the
load.
The best motor starting performance can be achieved by setting up the SLIP COMP function
block, refer to the Software Product Manual: “Programming Your Application” - SLIP COMP.
Also setting the BASE VOLTS parameter (VOLTAGE CONTROL function block) to 115.4%
and the FREQ SELECT parameter (PATTERN GEN function block) to 3kHz, can help to start
difficult loads in the most extreme cases.
Winder Applications
The drive contains function blocks for winder applications, refer to the Software Product
Manual, Chapter 5: “Application Macros”.
Roll Diameter Calculation Accuracy
With any centre winding system it is most important, under all conditions, that the roll diameter
is set within the winder block to accurately match the winding roll.
At Zero Speed
The diameter calculation division will not calculate accurately below a certain minimum line
speed, and will not calculate at all at zero speed.
If the diameter is not accurately set at zero speed the winder may not start without large changes
in web tension. It is therefore most important for good winder performance that the diameter is
reset to the correct value before the machine is started. The following diagrams show typical
ways to preset the roll diameter.
690+ Series AC Drive
Application Notes
10-5
Ultrasonic
sensor
Drive
Drive
+10V
Initial diameter
potentiometer
0V
+24V
+24V
Set diameter
pushbutton
Line zero
speed
relay
Figure 10-3 Roll Diameter
The left hand diagram above shows a simple, low accuracy way of pre-setting the roll diameter.
Here, a potentiometer is used by the machine operator to set the roll diameter. The potentiometer
is scaled such that 10V is 100% diameter. When the push button is pressed, the diameter
calculator is preset to the potentiometer value. The push button should be suitably interlocked
with the line drive so that the diameter cannot be preset when the machine is running.
The right hand diagram shows a more accurate method where the diameter is measured using an
ultrasonic sensor. This measurement technique is especially useful for unwind applications
where the diameter of the incoming roll is not known.
Other methods such as mechanical diameter followers, or lay on arms can be useful to provide
the diameter signal. The requirements here are correct scaling and linearity over the diameter
range.
It is also important to preset the diameter accurately in the case of twin turret winders. Here, the
diameter should be accurately preset using either diameter measurement in the case of unwinds,
or fixed potentiometers corresponding to the core diameters in the case of rewinds. The setting
of the diameter will determine the speed match of the new roll in relation to the line speed.
The winder block diameter calculator is frozen below a Line Reference threshold, set by the
MINIMUM SPEED parameter (DIAMETER CALC function block). The default value for this
parameter in the Winder macro is set at 5%. This is satisfactory for most line speeds and
diameter build-up ratios. The MINIMUM SPEED parameter must not be reduced significantly
as diameter errors may result at low line speeds.
When Running
Since the winder block calculates the roll diameter using a division of the Line Reference and
Winder Speed feedback signals, it is important that these signals are accurate.
Ideally, in order to improve accuracy, the diameter calculation signals need to be the actual
speeds of the line and winder. The reel speed reference however, needs to be driven from the
Line Reference in order to give good acceleration performance for the winder.
The following diagram shows the Line Reference and Line Speed signals used to give an
improved accuracy winder.
690+ Series AC Drive
10-6
Application Notes
Web must NEVER slip on
these line reference rolls
Reel Drive must
NEVER slip
Reel speed
Line
Speed
Diameter
Calc.
Calculated
diameter
default
Line
Reference
Ramp
alternative
Calculated reel speed
reference before PID
trim
Winder
Speed
Calc
Figure 10-4 Line Reference and Line Speed
By default, Line Speed is connected to ANIN 1 and is used both as Line Reference and Line
Speed.
Alternatively, a separate analog input for Line Reference may be used for the winder speed
calculation.
If an analog tach is used for Line Speed, it must be scaled ±10V full scale.
Note: It is most important for centre wind systems that the web does not slip on the line
reference rolls. Also the reel drive must never slip.
If slipping does occur, the diameter calculator will not be accurate, and very poor winder
performance will result.
Basic Set-up Instruction
This section describes the operations required to set up drives containing the closed loop winder
blocks.
Two different types of closed loop winders are described above, but the basic steps required to
set up the drive are very similar in both cases.
If the drive is configured using the display and keys, it is important to ensure that the parameters
of the drive are saved to the application on a regular basis. If this is not done, parameters
adjusted during the following set-up may be lost if the auxiliary supply to the drive fails.
Information Required
The following information is required from the winding machine manufacturer in order to set up
the winder blocks:
• Absolute minimum roll diameter.
• Absolute maximum roll diameter.
• Absolute maximum line speed.
• Motor maximum speed, at smallest roll diameter and maximum line speed.
690+ Series AC Drive
10-7
Application Notes
Set-up with no Web connected to the Winder
The majority of the drive set-up should be performed without web connected to the centre
winder. This allows the winding spindle to rotate freely, without being restrained by the web.
Before configuring the Closed Loop centre winder load the Winder macro, refer to the Software
Product Manual, Chapter 5: “Application Macros”.
DIAMETER CALC Function Block
Set the MINIMUM DIAMETER parameter with the drive stopped.
This value can be calculated, knowing the absolute maximum and minimum roll diameters and
applying the equation:
Min Diameter =
Smallest core diameter
Maximum roll diameter
× 100%
It is important that the absolute maximum range of diameter is used when calculating the
minimum diameter parameter.
Commission the Drive Control Loops
Since the winder blocks are equally applicable for Unwind and Rewind applications the
following convention for the sign of the various set points and the direction of rotation, is
useful:
Unwind
Forward line
direction
Rewind
Forward line
direction
Positive setpoint
and rotation
Positive setpoint
and rotation
Positive
torque
Positive
torque
Motor
Motor
All directions are shown overwinding, with
OVERWIND set TRUE
Figure 10-5 Conventions
Equations
The following equations are used to determine motor torque and power requirements.
Simple Centre Winder Equations
It is assumed that the winders operate in constant tension mode.
Unwind
Line Reference
Tension
Tension
Belt /
Gearbox
Speed
Rewind
Speed
Torque
Torque
Motor
Figure 10-6 Constant Tension Winder
690+ Series AC Drive
Belt /
Gearbox
Motor
10-8
Application Notes
Metric Units
The following SI units are used to produce the equations shown below.
Tension - Kilograms force (kgf)
Torque - Newton Metres (Nm)
Line Speed - Metres/Sec (MS-1)
Line accel - Metres/Sec2 (MS-2)
Rotation speed - RPM (RPM)
Roll Diameter - Metres (M)
Power - KWatt (kW)
Mass - kg (kg)
Motor Power
The following diagram shows the motor and roll powers at maximum line speed compared to
roll speed.
Power
Motor power
no field weakening
Motor power
with field weakening
Web power
+ Inertia power
Web power
Dmax
Base
speed
Dmin
(100%)
Roll Speed
Figure 10-7 Motor Power
The above graph is for the case of constant tension. Friction is ignored.
Tension × Max Line Speed
kW
101.94
Roll Mass × Max Line Accel × Max Line Speed
PowerInertia =
kW
2000
Motor Max Speed
× Motor Torque Friction kW
PowerFriction =
9549
Using the above individual roll powers
PowerRoll = PowerWeb + PowerInertia + PowerFriction kW
PowerWeb =
Referring to a motor with field weakening
⎧
Diameter Build Up ⎫
∴ PowerMotor = ⎨(PowerWeb + PowerInertia ) ×
⎬ + PowerFriction kW
Cons tan t Power Range ⎭
⎩
Here, the Constant Power Range is the motor field weakening range.
This parameter is 1 if no field weakening.
690+ Series AC Drive
Application Notes
Motor Torque
The worst case motor torque will exist for the following conditions:
Maximum roll diameter
Maximum acceleration rate
Maximum roll width
Maximum material tension
Maximum roll mass
Torque Tension = Tension × Roll Diameter × 4.905
Assuming the roll is a solid cylinder
TorqueInertia =
Roll Mass × Line Accel × Roll Diameter
4
TorqueRoll = Torque Tension + TorqueInertia
∴ Torque Motor =
TorqueRoll
Ratio Gearbox
+ TorqueFriction
Motor Speed
The maximum motor speed will exist under the following conditions:
Maximum line speed
Smallest core diameter
Maximum gearbox ratio
SpeedRoll =
SpeedLine
Diameter
× 19.1 RPM
∴ SpeedMotor = SpeedRoll × Ratio Gearbox RPM
690+ Series AC Drive
10-9
10-10
Application Notes
2-Q Common DC Bus Applications
Using a common DC bus allows regenerative energy to be shared between the drives on the
system, improving efficiency.
Two Options are shown below. Both options are single-ended, i.e. no power is returned from the
control system to the mains. It is redistributed throughout the system, resulting in less drain from
the supply.
Note: The choice of option will depend upon the application and different quantities/powers of
inverters, to provide the greatest efficiency.
OPTION 1
Small numbers of drives can be coupled together on both the AC supply side and DC bus side.
AC Supply
AC Fuses
AC Line Chokes
AC
Drive
DC+
AC
Drive
AC
Drive
DC-
DC+
DC+
DC-
DC-
Contactor
AC Motor
AC Motor
AC Motor
DC Fuses
>700V
Common DC Bus
Considerations
• AC fuses should be fast-acting. Ideally, add fuse monitoring to shut down the total system
in the event of any AC fuse failure.
•
AC line chokes must be fitted (minimum 3% per unit impedance). Use the following
formula to derive the value of inductance required to satisfy the per unit impedance
requirement:
LINE VOLTS
=
363 x INPUT CURRENT (A) x FREQUENCY (Hz)
INDUCTANCE (H)
where 363 = (2 x π x √ 3 x 100) / 3
•
Sequence contactors so that the AND of all the DRIVE READY signals starts a short timer
which in turn closes all the contactors together. The contactors should not be opened until
line stop, not even under fault conditions.
•
Because the drives are fed from the AC side, clearing of the DC fuses may not present a
run-threatening situation. The drives will remain functional unless the isolated drive
regenerates power. Consider using indicating fuses, especially if a drive is permanently
regenerating.
690+ Series AC Drive
Application Notes
10-11
OPTION 2
The drives are coupled together on the DC bus side only. The drives AC inputs are unused.
DC+
Common DC Bus
DC Source
for example:
590+
DC690+
>700V
DC Link Fuses
DC+
DC-
DC-
AC
Drive
AC
Drive
U
V
DC+
W
AC Motor
U
V
W
AC Motor
Considerations
• The DC Source must be correctly rated to match the maximum power to be imported into
the system. Use the following formula which takes into account form factor and efficiency:
DC CURRENT (DC A) >=
2000 x SP
VL
where: SP = Supply Power (kW)
V L = Supply Line Volts (V)
•
Fit DC link fusing to protect cabling to each drive.
Check the voltage rating of any DC link components. Voltages >700V are common.
690+ Series AC Drive
10-12
Application Notes
4-Q Regen Control/Common DC Bus Applications
Introduction
A 4-Q REGEN (4 Quadrant Regenerative) control mode is available on all 690+ Series AC
Drives that :
♦
use Software Version 5.1 or greater
AND
♦
display “/007” in Block 12 of the (Europe) Product Code, indicating that Special
Option 7 is applied (“Y” cap disconnection)
IMPORTANT: All drives in a common DC link scheme using a 4-Q Regen front-end must have their
internal "Y" caps to earth (PE) removed.
The 4-Q REGEN control mode allows a single 690+ to act as a 4-Q power supply unit that is
capable of drawing (motoring) and supplying (regenerating) sinusoidal, near-unity power factor
current from the supply.
The output from the 4-Q Regen drive acts as a DC supply which is used to power other drives
on a common DC Bus system.
Advantages
Using the 690+ as a 4-Q power supply in common DC Bus schemes provides the following
advantages:
•
Simplified approach to Common DC Link systems
•
Allows standard 690+ drive to act as 4-Q DC Link power supply unit
•
Near-sinusoidal supply currents (Motoring and Regenerating)
•
Near-unity power factor operation (0.99 or better)
•
Low supply harmonics currents (helps to meet G5/4 and IEEE519)
WARNING!
690+ AC Drives operating in 4-Q REGEN control mode are NOT suitable for
use on systems where the mains supply (L1, L2, L3) is provided by a generator
(where the supply cannot absorb the regenerated current).
690+ Series AC Drive
Application Notes
10-13
4-Q Active Front End
The 4-Q Regen drive requires the following 4-Q Active Front End:
Notes:
Contactor CON1 is rated to match the 4-Q power supply drive current (AC1 rating)
The 3% and 5% line chokes are custom designed for this application. Refer to page 10-22.
Power Filter Panel
690+ Series AC Drive
Frame
kW
Volts
Part Number
110V fans + control
Part Number
230V fans + control
B
4
230
LA482467U004
LA482470U004
C
7.5
230
LA482467U011
LA482470U011
D
18.5
230
LA482467U018
LA482470U018
E
22
230
LA482467U030
LA482470U030
F
45
230
LA482467U055
LA482470U055
B
6
400
LA482468U006
LA482471U006
C
15
400
LA482468U018
LA482471U018
D
30
400
LA482468U037
LA482471U037
E
45
400
LA482468U055
LA482471U055
F
90
400
LA482468U110
LA482471U110
G
180
400
LA482468U220
LA482471U220
H
280
400
LA482468U315
LA482471U315
J
315
400
LA482468U355
LA482471U355
B
6
500
LA482469U006
LA482472U006
C
15
500
LA482469U018
LA482472U018
D
30
500
LA482469U037
LA482472U037
E
45
500
LA482469U055
LA482472U055
F
90
500
LA482469U110
LA482472U110
G
180
500
LA482469U220
LA482472U220
H
280
500
LA482469U315
LA482472U315
J
315
500
LA482469U355
LA482472U355
10-14
Application Notes
EMC Filtering
We recommend all 690+ Regen systems meet the EMC product specific standard EN618003:1997. To achieve this, an EMC filter is required. Refer to Chapter 8 for details of suitable
filters.
Contactor and Fusing
♦
Use AC Line Fuses to protect the 4-Q Regen drive. These fast, semiconductor protection
fuses must be capable of withstanding the system AC supply voltage. Refer to "Input Fuse
Ratings" in Chapter 8.
♦
The AC contactor, CON1, used in the external pre-charge circuit must have an AC1 or
thermal rating of the constant torque current rating of the 4-Q Regen drive. Refer to page
10-21.
♦
Use DC Link fuses in both the DC+ and DC- lines to protect each drive connected to the
common DC bus. The fuses must be of suitable current rating and capable of withstanding
1000Vdc . Although HRC fuses would be adequate, the high DC voltage requirement
(1000Vdc) may limit the choice to semiconductor fuses. Refer to page 10-20.
♦
The DC contactor used in the Brake Mode system (described on page 10-19) must have an
adequate thermal rating for the regen current required. Typically the regen rating of the
system, and hence the rating of the DC contactor and fuses, will be less than motoring
requirement as the contactor should not open under load.
690+ Series AC Drive
10-15
Application Notes
Drive Set-up
The 690+ drive must be set-up
correctly to work in a 4-Q Regen
Control/Common DC Bus
Application.
Typically a 690+ system will
contain a 4-Q Regen drive
providing the 4-Q power supply,
and one or more 690+ drives on
the common DC bus.
Regen Control
–
–
–
–
–
–
TRUE –
720V –
FALSE –
SYNCHRONIZING
[1641] –
SYNCHRONIZED
[1642] –
PHASE LOSS
[1643] –
CLOSE PRECHARGE
[1644] –
ENABLE DRIVE
[1645] –
STATUS
[1646] –
[1633] PRECHARGE CLOSED –
[1634] DC VOLTS DEMAND
–
[1678] BRAKE MODE
–
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
SUPPLY FREQ LOW
Settings
All 690+ Drives
ALL 690+ drives in the system MUST have their "Y" caps disconnected (see
"Introduction" on page 10-12).
Set the demanded boosted DC link voltage (DC VOLTS
DEMAND) appropriately for the drive voltage rating. This is given
in the separate table below.
Refer to the Software Product Manual, Chapter 1 for a full
description of the REGEN CONTROL function block parameters.
690+ 4-Q Regen Drive:
MMI Menu Map
Load "Macro 8" via the RESTORE CONFIG menu.
1
Refer to page 10-16 for wiring details.
2
SY STEM
RESTORE CONFIG
RESTORE CONFIG
MMI Menu Map
Set the CONTROL MODE parameter to "4-Q REGEN".
Set the LEAKAGE INDUC parameter to the value of the total line
choke inductance. Refer to page 10-23.
1
SETUP
2
MOTOR CONTROL
3
MOTOR DATA
CONTROL MODE
LEAKAGE INDUC
Other 690+ Drives on the Bus
Set the ENABLE parameter in the SLEW RATE LIMIT function
block to FALSE. This disables ramp-hold during deceleration on
high link volts feature.
If in Volts/Hz motor control mode, the VOLTAGE MODE
parameter in the VOLTAGE CONTROL function block MUST be
set to FIXED. This will ensure the motor is not overfluxed by the
boosted 720V DC Bus. Failure to do this may lead to motor
overheating and possible burn out.
Setting for DC VOLTS DEMAND Parameter
690+ Series AC Drive
Drive Voltage
Rating (V)
Under Volts
Trip Level (V)
Over Volts
Trip Level (V)
Recommended
DC VOLTS DEMAND
380V – 460V
410V
820V
720V
220V – 240V
205V
410V
370V
10-16
Application Notes
Macro 8 : 4Q Regen
Macro 8 is provided to simplify the set-up of 4-Q Regen systems. A full description of Macro 8
can be found in the Software Product Manual, Chapter 5.
Note:
To use Macro 8, set the CONTROL MODE parameter to "4-Q REGEN", and set the
LEAKAGE INDUC parameter to the value of the total line choke inductance (refer to page
10-23), as discussed in "Drive Set-up" page 10-15.
Macro 8 provides the following connections:
♦
Digital Input 1 (terminal 12, PRECHARGE CLOSED, Tag 1633) is used to confirm the
status of the pre-charge circuit (open or closed). The 4-Q Regen drive is not allowed to
synchronise to the mains unless the pre-charge relay is closed and the NOT COAST STOP
parameter is True.
♦
Digital Input 2 (terminal 13, NOT COAST STOP, Tag 278) is used to run the 4-Q Regen
drive.
♦
Digital Output 3 (terminals 25 & 26, CLOSE PRECHARGE, Tag 1644) controls the
external pre-charge circuit and goes True to close the contactor when DC link volts are
established.
In Macro 8, the Run command is default True. Thus the drive automatically synchronises to the
mains when the pre-charge relay closes. Digital Input 2 is used to cause a coast stop in case of
emergencies.
–
–
–
–
–
Digital Input 1
–
software link –
TRUE
720V –
FALSE –
Regen Control
SYNCHRONIZING
[1641] –
SYNCHRONIZED
[1642] –
PHASE LOSS
[1643] –
CLOSE PRECHARGE
[1644] –
ENABLE DRIVE
[1645] –
STATUS
[1646] –
[1633] PRECHARGE CLOSED –
–
[1634] DC VOLTS DEMAND
–
[1678] BRAKE MODE
FALSE
FALSE
Digital Output 3
FALSE
software link
FALSE
FALSE
SUPPLY FREQ LOW
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DOUT1_A
DOUT1_B
DOUT2_A
DOUT2_B
DOUT3_A
DOUT3_B
0V
AIN1
AIN2
AIN3
AIN4
AOUT1
AOUT2
AOUT3
+10V REF
-10V REF
TB3
0V
DIN1 (PRE-CHARGE CLOSED)
DIN2 (NOT COAST STOP)
DIN3
DIN4
DIN5
DIN6
DIN7 (REMOTE TRIP RESET)
DIN8 (EXT TRIP)
+24VC
Connection Diagram for Macro 8
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24 25 26
TB1
TB2
HEALTH
220V AC 3A maximum
into a resistive load (default)
CLOSE
PRECHARGE
RUNNING
690+ Series AC Drive
Application Notes
10-17
A Single Motor System
Boosted Common
DC Link Supply
U
4-Q Active Front End
DC+
690+ Drive
V
(4-Q Power Supply)
W
DC+
720V
DC
Link Fuses
DC -
690+ Drive
DC U
V
W
External Pre - Charge
Control
Motor Load
AC Motor
The simplest configuration for 4-Q Regen control is a single 690+ Regen drive acting as the
unity power factor supply, connected via the DC link to another 690+ driving the application.
Applications of single motor 4-Q Regen systems include :
•
Hoist and Elevators
•
Dynamometer test rigs
•
Unwind Stands
•
Installations that would otherwise require a Harmonic Power Filter
In this system, the two 690+ drives are matched in power. The 4-Q Regen drive supplies the full
motoring and regenerating requirement of the load.
Additional external equipment required by the 4-Q Regen drive includes :
• EMC Filter
•
AC Line Fuses
•
DC Link Fuses
No extra hardware is required to detect the rotation, frequency and phase of the mains supply.
Also, no dynamic braking resistor is required.
When mains power is applied to the 4-Q Regen drive, the DC link slowly charges through the
external pre-charge circuit and the drive's internal power supply will start in the normal way. If
the 4-Q Regen drive is healthy and the Run signal is applied, it will synchronise to the mains
supply (phase, rotation and frequency). This process takes approximately 100ms. After
synchronisation, the DC link on the common bus is boosted to approximately 720V (on a 400V
product). This high value of DC link volts is required for successful regen operation.
690+ Series AC Drive
10-18
Application Notes
A Multi-Motor System
Boosted Common
DC Link Supply
U
4-Q Active Front End
DC+
690+ Drive
V
(4-Q Power Supply)
W
720V
DC -
DC Link Fuses
External Pre - Charge
Control
DC+
DC -
DC -
690+
Drive
690+
Drive
U
V
DC+
W
U
V
W
AC Motor
AC Motor
Motor Acting as Brake
(Regenerating)
Motor Acting as Load
(Motoring)
In many applications, the total power consumed by the system is less than the installed power of
the drives. This is because some drives are motoring (eg. winders) and some are regenerating
(eg. unwinders). In these situations it is convenient to connect the drives on a common DC link.
In this system, the 4-Q Regen drive supplies the motoring and regenerating requirement of the
load.
Additional external equipment required by the 4-Q Regen drive includes :
• EMC Filter
•
AC Line Fuses
•
DC Link Fuses
No extra hardware is required to detect the rotation, frequency and phase of the mains supply.
Also, no dynamic braking resistor is required.
The 4-Q Regen drive draws sinusoidal, unity power factor current from the supply and only has
to be rated for either the power consumed or supplied by the system, or by the system braking
requirements, whichever is the larger.
Dynamic Braking (eg. for Emergency Stopping purposes) can still be used in this control mode
if required.
690+ Series AC Drive
10-19
Application Notes
A Smart Brake System
DC Link
Healthy
4-Q Active Front End
V
Common DC Link
DC+
U
690+ Drive
(Smart Brake)
W
DC DC Link
Contactor
Isolating
Transformer
External Pre -Charge
Control
DC
Link
Fuses
3-Phase
Line Choke
DC -
DC+
DC -
3%
DC+
3%
DC Link
Healthy
690+
Drive
690+
Drive
U
V
3-Phase
Line Choke
W
U
V
3-Phase
Supply
W
AC Motor
AC Motor
Motor Acting as Brake
(Regenerating)
Motor Acting as Load
(Motoring)
IMPORTANT: It is essential to use an isolation transformer on the supply to the Smart Brake drive, as
shown above.
The 4-Q Regen drive can act as a Smart Brake:
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP
4-Q Regen Drive:
2 MOTOR CONTROL
♦
3 REGEN CNTROL
BRAKE MODE
In addition to the settings given in "Drive Set-up", page 10-15, set the BRAKE MODE
parameter in the REGEN CONTROL function block to TRUE.
In this system, the 4-Q Regen drive supplies the regenerating requirement of the load.
Additional external equipment required by the 4-Q Regen drive includes :
• EMC Filter
•
AC Line Fuses
•
DC Link Fuses
During motoring operation, the drives on the common link are supplied via their own internal
3-phase diode bridge. The 4-Q Regen drive tracks the mains supply but does not supply
motoring power to the common DC Link.
During regeneration, the DC link voltage will rise and trigger the 4-Q Regen drive to return
the excess power to the mains (sinusoidal current, unity power factor).
Thus, the 4-Q Regen drive acts as a smart, no loss, Dynamic Brake.
The BRAKE MODE allows the level of regeneration (braking) capacity in the system to be
rated differently from the required motoring capacity.
When using the Brake Mode, each drive is responsible for pre-charging its own DC Link. When
an individual drive is pre-charged and healthy, it connects itself on to the common DC Bus via a
DC contactor.
The drives disconnect from the common bus if a trip occurs.
690+ Series AC Drive
10-20
Application Notes
DC Link Fuses
Below is a list of parts for the DC Link Fuses. Refer to the Electrical Ratings tables for
Quadratic Duty motor powers. Select the correct part for the drive's Motor Power.
Motor Power Frame DC Fuse
(Constant
Size
Rating
Duty
(A)
@ 400V)
(kW/Hp)
DC Fuse
Type
Fuse
Fuse Switch
Fuse Holder
0.75/1
B
15
CO89495J
CS481079
CS481099
CS481039
1.5/2
B
15
CO89495J
CS481079
CS481099
CS481039
2.2/3
B
15
CO89495J
CS481079
CS481099
CS481039
4/5
B
15
CO89495J
CS481079
CS481099
CS481039
5.5/7.5
C
40
SO86795J
CS481080
CS481099
CS481039
7.5/10
C
40
SO86795J
CS481080
CS481099
CS481039
11/15
C
40
SO86795J
CS481080
CS481099
CS481039
15/20
D
80
FWP 80BI
CS481081
CS481088
18.5/25
D
80
FWP 80BI
CS481081
CS481088
22/30
D
80
FWP 80BI
CS481081
CS481088
30/40
E
150
IXL70F150
CS481082
CS481088
37/50
E
150
IXL70F150
CS481082
CS481088
45/60
E
150
IXL70F150
CS481082
CS481088
55/75
F
300
IXL70F300
CS481083
CS481088
75/100
F
300
IXL70F300
CS481083
CS481088
90/125
F
300
IXL70F300
CS481083
CS481088
90/150
F
300
IXL70F300
CS481083
CS481088
110/150
G
350
IXL70F350
CS481084
CS481088
132/200
G
600
IXL70F600
CS481085
CS481088
160/250
G
600
IXL70F600
CS481085
CS481088
200/300
H
600
IXL70F600
CS481085
CS481088
220/350
H
800
FWP 800AI
CS481086
CS481088
250/400
H
800
FWP 800AI
CS481086
CS481088
280/450
H
800
FWP 800AI
CS481086
CS481088
315/500
J
900
FWP 900AI
CS481087
CS481088
690+ Series AC Drive
Application Notes
10-21
Pre-Charge Sizing
The external pre-charge contactor is required to carry the full load current rating (including
overload) of the 4-Q Regen drive. Thus, it must have an AC1 rating of the Constant Duty
current rating of the drive. Refer to the Electrical Ratings tables for Constant Duty motor
powers.
We recommend that standard Parker SSD Dynamic Braking resistors are used for the external
pre-charge circuit. The continuous and peak power capabilities of these resistors are given
below:
Parker SSD Part No
Resistance
(Ω)
Continuous Power
Rating
(W)
Peak Power Rating
(kW)
CZ389853
100
100
2.5
CZ463068
56
200
5
CZ388396
36
500
12.5
The recommended pre-charge resistor networks are shown in the table below. The table
indicates the amount of total DC Link capacitance the network can charge for a given supply
voltage.
External Pre-Charge Network
Continuous
Power
Rating
(W)
Impulse
Joule
Rating (J)
Pre-Charge
Capability
(μF) @
240Vrms
+10%
Pre-Charge
Capability
(μF) @
460Vrms
+10%
100 Ohm 100W
100
2,500
35,000
9,700
56 Ohm 200W
200
5,000
71,000
19,500
36 Ohm 500W
500
12,500
179,000
48,800
The internal DC Link Capacitance for each drive in the 690+ range is given in the table below:
690+ Series AC Drive
400V Units
230V Units
Drive Power
(kW/Hp)
Frame
μF
Frame
μF
0.75/1
B
190
B
380
1.5/2
B
190
B
760
2.2/3
B
380
B
1140
4/5
B
380
B
1520
5.5/7.5
C
500
C
2000
7.5/10
C
1000
C
3000
11/15
C
1000
D
3000
15/20
D
1500
D
4000
18.5/25
D
2000
D
4000
22/30
D
2000
E
6000
30/40
E
2500
F
11200
37/50
E
3000
F
11200
45/60
E
3500
F
11200
10-22
Application Notes
400V Units
230V Units
Drive Power
(kW/Hp)
Frame
μF
55/75
F
5600
75/100
F
5600
90/125
F
5600
90/150
F
5600
110/150
G
6600
132/200
G
9900
160/250
G
13500
180/300
G
13500
200/300
H
14850
220/350
H
14850
250/400
H
20250
280/450
H
20250
315/500
J
19800
Frame
μF
Simply sum the DC Link capacitance for all the drives on the common DC Link and select the
appropriate pre-charge network.
For example a system comprising 5, 30kW, 400V Frame E drives would have a total DC Link
capacitance of:
CTotal = 5 × 2500 μF = 12,500 μF
This is less than 19,500μF and thus a 56Ω, 200W (CZ463068) resistor will be adequate.
3-Phase Choke Sizing
One of the benefits of the 690+ 4-Q Regen drive is the reduction in the levels of harmonic
currents drawn from the supply. The total harmonic distortion (THD) of the mains current is
related to the PWM switching frequency, the supply voltage, the supply frequency and the
inductance of the 3-phase line choke. The maximum allowed PWM carrier frequency in nonoverload conditions, for each frame size is given below:
690+ Frame Size
PWM Carrier Frequency
B to F
3kHz
G and H
2.5kHz
J
2kHz
The IEEE 519 standard (IEEE Standard Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in
Electrical Power Systems ) requires a THD of current of 5%. The tables below show the
recommended 3-phase line chokes (5% and 3% in series) and expected THD of current for
400V and 230V drives.
The PWM switching produces high levels of harmonic current in the 3% chokes. It is essential
to have these properly rated to avoid significant overheating. Suitable chokes have been
developed for Parker SSD Drives and their Part Numbers are provided below.
690+ Series AC Drive
Application Notes
10-23
3% Choke
Drive
Frame
Size
Motor
Power
Input
Voltage
Active
Front End
(kW/Hp)
(V)
B
4/5
230
LA468346U004
C
7.5/10
230
D
18.5/25
E
Choke
Inductance
Currents
(μH)
50Hz
1kHz 2.5kHz
Sum
CO468341U004
854
14.95
0.39
0.00
15
LA468346U008
CO468341U011
503
25.38
0.66
0.00
26
230
LA468346U018
CO468341U018
208
61.63
1.59
0.00
62
22/30
230
LA468346U022
CO468341U030
177
72.50
1.87
0.00
73
F
45/60
230
LA468346U045
CO468341U055
92
139.57
3.60
0.00
140
B
6/10
400
LA468345U006
CO468325U006
1750
12.69
0.33
0.00
13
C
15/20
400
LA468345U015
CO468325U018
817
27.19
0.70
0.00
28
D
30/40
400
LA468345U030
CO468325U037
416
53.47
1.38
0.00
54
E
45/60
400
LA468345U045
CO468325U055
282
78.85
2.04
0.00
79
F
90/150
400
LA468345U090
CO468325U110
137
163.13
4.21
0.00
164
G
180/300
400
LA468345U180
CO468325U220
68
327.17
8.45
0.00
328
H
280/450
400
LA468345U280
CO468325U315
48
471.28
12.17
0.00
472
J
315/500
400
LA468345U315
CO468325U355
42
534.72
13.81
0.00
535
Choke
Inductance
5% Choke
Drive
Frame
Size
Motor
Power
Input
Voltage
Active
Front End
(kW/Hp)
(V)
B
4/5
230
LA468346U004
C
7.5/10
230
D
18.5/25
E
Currents
(μH)
50Hz
1kHz 2.5kHz
CO468342U004
1424
14.85
0.30
2.72
16
LA468346U008
CO468342U011
839
25.20
0.50
4.61
26
230
LA468346U018
CO468342U018
346
61.20
1.22
11.20
63
22/30
230
LA468346U022
CO468342U030
294
72.00
1.44
13.18
74
F
45/60
230
LA468346U045
CO468342U055
153
138.60
2.77
25.36
141
B
6/10
400
LA468345U006
CO468326U006
2918
12.60
0.25
2.31
13
C
15/20
400
LA468345U015
CO468326U018
1362
27.00
0.54
4.94
28
D
30/40
400
LA468345U030
CO468326U037
693
53.10
1.06
9.72
54
E
45/60
400
LA468345U045
CO468326U055
470
78.30
1.57
14.33
80
F
90/150
400
LA468345U090
CO468326U110
227
162.00
3.24
29.65
165
G
180/300
400
LA468345U180
CO468326U220
114
324.90
6.50
59.46
331
H
280/450
400
LA468345U280
CO468326U315
79
468.00
9.36
85.64
476
J
315/500
400
LA468345U315
CO468326U355
70
531.00
10.62
97.17
540
Note:
690+ Series AC Drive
Lower values for THD of current can be achieved by adding extra line impedance.
Sum
10-24
Application Notes
690+ Series AC Drive
The Default Application
11-1
APPLICATION MACROS
1
The Default Application
The drive is supplied with various macros. Each macro recalls a pre-programmed set of
parameters when it is loaded.
• Macro 1 is the factory default macro, providing for basic speed control
Note: Refer to the Software Product Manual for details of other macros.
Macro Descriptions
Note: Parameters whose default values are product-related are indicated in the block diagrams
with * or **. Refer to Chapter 2: “An Overview of the Drive” - Product-Related Default
Values.
Macro 0
This macro will not control a motor.
It is included to document the differences between all the configurations, using this as the baseline.
Loading Macro 0 removes all internal links, and sets all parameter values to the values defined
for each function block in the Software Product Manual - Chapter 1: Programming Your
Application.
The OPERATOR Menu for Macro 0
The default OPERATOR menu is shown below.
STARTUP SCREEN
690+ Series AC Drive
SETPOINT (REMOTE)
SPEED DEMAND
DRIVE FREQUENCY
MOTOR CURRENT
LOAD
DC LINK VOLTS
CURRENT LIMITING
ENTER PASSWORD
11-2
The Default Application
690+ Series AC Drive
The Default Application 11-3
Value Func 1
100.00 %
0.00 %
0..+10 V
FALSE
0.00 %
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
100.00 %
0.00 %
0..+10 V
FALSE
0.00 %
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
VALUE
BREAK
[ 14]
[ 15]
[ 13]
[ 12]
[ 17]
Minimum Speed
OUTPUT [133] – 0.00 %
Analog Input 1
[ 16] – 0.00 %
[ 18] – FALSE
SCALE
–
OFFSET
–
TYPE
–
BREAK ENABLE
–
BREAK VALUE
–
(1)0.00 % – [130] INPUT A
(3)0.00 % – [131] INPUT B
0.00 – [132] INPUT C
OUTPUT [346] – 0.00 %
–
OUTPUT HZ [363] – 0.0 Hz
–
A+B+C – [134] TYPE
INPUT HZ [362] – 0.0 Hz
–
(11)0.00 % – [340] INPUT
VALUE
BREAK
[ 25] – 0.00 %
[ 27] – FALSE
SCALE
–
OFFSET
–
TYPE
–
BREAK ENABLE
–
BREAK VALUE
–
Reference
OUTPUT [335] – 0.00 %
–
Analog Input 2
[ 23]
[ 24]
[ 22]
[ 21]
[ 26]
Skip Frequencies
(12) 0.00 % – [336] INPUT
-100.00 % – [337] MINIMUM
PROP. W/MIN. – [338] MODE
SPEED DEMAND [255] – 0.00 %
–
SPEED SETPOINT [254] – 0.00 %
–
REVERSE [256] – FALSE
0.0 Hz – [341] BAND 1
–
LOCAL REVERSE [250] – FALSE
0.0 Hz – [342] FREQUENCY 1
–
COMMS SETPOINT [770] – 0.00 %
0.0 Hz – [680] BAND 2
–
0.0 Hz – [343] FREQUENCY 2
–
0.0 Hz – [681] BAND 3
–
0.0 Hz – [344] FREQUENCY 3
–
-110.00 % – [253] MIN SPEED CLAMP
–
0.0 Hz – [682] BAND 4
–
FALSE – [243] TRIM IN LOCAL
–
0.0 Hz – [345] FREQUENCY 4
–
FALSE – [249] REMOTE REVERSE
–
(4)
FALSE
FALSE
TRIP
FALSE
FALSE
–
THERMIST [1155]
–
ENCODER TB [1156]
–
EXTERNAL
[234]
– [760] INVERT THERMIST
– [1154] INVERT ENC TRIP
– [233] EXT TRIP MODE
– [235] INPUT 1 BREAK
– [236] INPUT 2 BREAK
(13)
0.00 % – [245] REMOTE SETPOINT
–
0.00 % – [248] SPEED TRIM
–
110.00 % – [252] MAX SPEED CLAMP
(16)
VALUE [ 31] – FALSE
INVERT
Trips Status
–
ACTIVE TRIPS
[ 4] – 0000
ACTIVE TRIPS+ [740] – 0000
Digital Input 2
VALUE
FALSE – [ 33]
WARNINGS
[ 34] – FALSE
INVERT
[ 5] – 0000
FIRST TRIP
–
0040 – [742] DISABLED TRIPS+
–
VALUE
–
Digital Input 5
VALUE [ 43] – FALSE
FALSE – [ 42]
INVERT
–
Digital Input 6
VALUE [726] – FALSE
FALSE – [725] INVERT
–
(5)
Digital Input 7
(6)
(7)
VALUE [728] – FALSE
FALSE – [727] INVERT
–
VALUE
SCALE
OFFSET
ABSOLUTE
TYPE
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
OUTPUT
0.00 % –
[ 58] INPUT
** 1500 RPM – [1032] MAX SPEED
[ 59] – 0.0 Hz
–
–
RUN RAMP
10.0 s
0.10 %
0.500 s
RAMPED
30.0 s
0.1 s
1200 Hz/s
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
[244]
[258]
[259]
[268]
[267]
[692]
[693]
[694]
[695]
[696]
[697]
[691]
[260]
RAMPING [698]
RAMP TYPE
ACCEL TIME
DECEL TIME
SYMMETRIC MODE
SYMMETRIC TIME
SRAMP ACCEL
SRAMP DECEL
SRAMP JERK 1
SRAMP JERK 2
SRAMP JERK 3
SRAMP JERK 4
SRAMP CONTINUOUS
HOLD
– FALSE
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Analog Output 2
Sequencing Logic
[ 40] – FALSE
INVERT
[ 45]
[ 46]
[ 47]
[ 48]
[ 49]
Setpoint Scale
(18)
Reference Stop
–
Digital Input 4
FALSE – [ 39]
LINEAR
10.0 s
10.0 s
FALSE
10.0 s
10.00 /s^2
10.00 /s^2
10.00 /s^3
10.00 /s^3
10.00 /s^3
10.00 /s^3
TRUE
FALSE
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
[ 6] – NONE
0600 – [231] DISABLED TRIPS
VALUE [ 37] – FALSE
INVERT
–
–
–
–
–
WARNINGS+ [741] – 0000
–
Digital Input 3
FALSE – [ 36]
0.00 %
100.00 %
0.00 %
TRUE
0..+10 V
Reference Ramp
– FALSE
– FALSE
– FALSE
–
–
–
–
–
Digital Input 1
FALSE – [ 30]
(17)
LOCAL SETPOINT [247] – 0.00 %
–
I/O Trips
(2)
Analog Output 1
–
(9)
(8)
(10)
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
TRUE
FALSE
FALSE
TRUE
FALSE
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
TRIPPED [289]
RUNNING [285]
JOGGING [302]
STOPPING [303]
OUTPUT CONTACTOR [286]
SWITCH ON ENABLE [288]
SWITCHED ON [306]
READY [287]
SYSTEM RESET [305]
SEQUENCER STATE [301]
REMOTE REV OUT [296]
HEALTHY [274]
[291] RUN FORWARD
[292] RUN REVERSE
[293] NOT STOP
[280] JOG
[1235] CONTACTOR CLOSED
[276] DRIVE ENABLE
[277] NOT FAST STOP
[278] NOT COAST STOP
[294] REMOTE REVERSE
[282] REM TRIP RESET
[290] TRIP RST BY RUN
[283] POWER UP START
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
START ENABLED
FALSE
TRUE
[279]
[263]
[266]
[284]
[304]
[275]
[264]
[126]
RUN STOP MODE
STOP TIME
STOP ZERO SPEED
STOP DELAY
FAST STOP MODE
FAST STOP LIMIT
FAST STOP TIME
FINAL STOP RATE
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Reference Jog
10.00 % – [246] SETPOINT
1.0 s – [261] ACCEL TIME
1.0 s – [262] DECEL TIME
–
–
–
0.00 %
100.00 %
0.00 %
FALSE
-10 .. +10 V
–
–
–
–
–
[731]
[732]
[733]
[734]
[735]
0.00 %
100.00 %
0.00 %
FALSE
-10 .. +10 V
–
–
–
–
–
[800]
[801]
[802]
[803]
[804]
VALUE
SCALE
OFFSET
ABSOLUTE
TYPE
Analog Output 3
VALUE
SCALE
OFFSET
ABSOLUTE
TYPE
Digital Output
(14)
100.00 %
0.00 %
0..+10 V
FALSE
0.00 %
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
VALUE
BREAK
[713]
[714]
[712]
[711]
[716]
[715] – 0.00 %
[717] – FALSE
SCALE
–
OFFSET
–
TYPE
–
BREAK ENABLE
–
BREAK VALUE
–
Analog Input 4
100.00 %
0.00 %
0..+10 V
FALSE
0.00 %
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
[720]
[721]
[719]
[718]
[723]
VALUE [722] – 0.00 %
BREAK [724] – FALSE
SCALE
–
OFFSET
–
TYPE
–
BREAK ENABLE
–
BREAK VALUE
–
–
–
–
–
–
1
FALSE – [ 52]
VALUE
–
TRUE – [ 51]
INVERT
–
Digital Output
(15)
Analog Input 3
–
–
–
–
–
FALSE – [ 55]
VALUE
FALSE – [ 54]
INVERT
Digital Output
2
–
–
3
FALSE – [737] VALUE
–
FALSE – [736] INVERT
–
Macro 1: Basic Speed Control (default)
690+ Series Frequency Inverter
The Default Application 11-4
Macro 1: Basic Speed Control (default)
This macro provides standard control of the inverter.
Control Wiring I/O
Terminal
Name
Purpose
Comment
2
ANALOG INPUT 1
Speed Setpoint
0V = 0%, 10V = 100%
3
ANALOG INPUT 2
Speed Trim
0V = 0%, 10V = 100%
6
ANALOG OUTPUT 1
Ramp Output
absolute speed demand
0V = 0%, 10V = 100%
12
DIGITAL INPUT 1
Run Forward
24V = run forward
13
DIGITAL INPUT 2
Run Reverse
24V = run reverse
14
DIGITAL INPUT 3
Not Stop
24V = RUN FWD and RUN
REV signals latched
0V = RUN FWD and RUN REV
signals not latched
15
DIGITAL INPUT 4
Remote Reverse
0V = remote forward
24V = remote reverse
16
DIGITAL INPUT 5
Jog
24V = jog
18
DIGITAL INPUT 7
Remote Trip
Reset
24V = reset trips
19
DIGITAL INPUT 8
External Trip
Non-configurable
0V = Trip
(connect to terminal 20)
21, 22
DIGITAL OUTPUT 1
Health
0V = tripped, i.e. not healthy
23, 24
DIGITAL OUTPUT 2
Running
0V = stopped, 24V = running
The Operator Menu for Macro 1
The default Operator Menu is shown below.
OPERATOR MENU
690+ Series Frequency Inverter
SPEED DEMAND
DRIVE FREQUENCY
MOTOR CURRENT
TORQUE FEEDBACK
DC LINK VOLTS
ISS.
MODIFICATION
ECN No.
DATE
DRAWN
CHK'D
1
First printed release of HA465492U005. Software
Version 5.x.
17111
(17168)
(16843)
(17130)
8/1/03
CM
MP
2
New ratings information, pages 8-9, 8-12 and 8-13.
Brake output values changed, pages 9-7 to 9-9.
Gland plate change, page 2-1.
6901 cut-out diagram updated, page 3-22.
17728
(17585)
(16842)
(17647)
6/8/03
CM
MP
3
Change of company name and logo to SSD Drives
Ltd.
18354
2/11/04
CM
MP
(17756)
(17800)
New vibration information, page 8-5.
New System Board I/O information, page 8-21
Various small amendments
4
New 690+ frame B diecast heatsink. Various small
changes.
18432
20/10/05
CM
MP
5
New EMC Directive information.
Frame F IP rating details.
Company name change.
19887
S11447
(19591)
23/04/07
CM
MP
FIRST USED ON
MODIFICATION RECORD
690+ Series AC Drive
DRAWING NUMBER
SHT. 1
ZZ465492
OF 1
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising